SlideShare a Scribd company logo
Front cover


IBM Tivoli Intelligent
ThinkDynamic Orchestrator
Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners


Installation and customization


Data center modeling


Workload simulation




                                               Edson Manoel
                                                Tony French



ibm.com/redbooks                    Redpaper
Ibm tivoli intelligent think dynamic orchestrator pre proof of-concept cookbook for business partners redp3830
International Technical Support Organization

IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator
Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business
Partners

February 2004
Note: Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in
 “Notices” on page vii.




First Edition (February 2004)

This edition applies to IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator Version 1.1.0 and IBM
Tivoli Provisioning Manager Version 1.1.0.
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2004. All rights reserved.
Note to U.S. Government Users Restricted Rights -- Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP
Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
Contents

                 Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
                 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii

                 Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
                 Recommended reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
                 The team that wrote this Redpaper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
                 Become a published author . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
                 Comments welcome. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi

                 Chapter 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

                 Chapter 2. Planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
                 2.1 Interviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
                 2.2 General questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
                 2.3 ITITO components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
                    2.3.1 Power units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
                    2.3.2 Network configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
                    2.3.3 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
                    2.3.4 Spare pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
                    2.3.5 Applications and customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
                    2.3.6 Other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
                    2.3.7 Scoping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

                 Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
                 3.1 Installation process overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
                    3.1.1 Recommended installation directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
                    3.1.2 User IDs and passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
                 3.2 Installing and configuring TIOdbsrv - Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
                    3.2.1 Creating the required user IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
                    3.2.2 Installing and configuring Cygwin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
                    3.2.3 Configuring SSH communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
                    3.2.4 Installing and configuring IBM DB2 UDB V8.1.2 on Windows . . . . . 34
                    3.2.5 Installing and configuring IBM Directory Server V5.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
                 3.3 Installing and configuring TIOsrv - Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
                    3.3.1 Creating the required user IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
                    3.3.2 Installing and configuring Cygwin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
                    3.3.3 Configuring SSH communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
                    3.3.4 Installing IBM DB2 Universal Database V8.1.2 Client. . . . . . . . . . . . 48
                    3.3.5 Installing and configuring IBM Directory V5.1 Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50



© Copyright IBM Corp. 2004. All rights reserved.                                                                                      iii
3.3.6 Installing IBM WebSphere Application Server Base V5.0. . . . . . . . . 52
                   3.3.7 Install the IBM WebSphere fixpack 1 and required fixes. . . . . . . . . . 55
                   3.3.8 Installing IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator . . . . . . . 67

               Chapter 4. Creating the demonstration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
               4.1 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
                  4.1.1 WordPad or Notepad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
                  4.1.2 Cooktop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
                  4.1.3 XMLSpy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
               4.2 Designing the data center model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
                  4.2.1 ITITO GUI method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
                  4.2.2 The XML method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
                  4.2.3 DOCTYPE element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
                  4.2.4 Power supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
                  4.2.5 Network components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
                  4.2.6 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
                  4.2.7 Spare pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
                  4.2.8 ITITO configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
                  4.2.9 Customers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
               4.3 Sample XML files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
                  4.3.1 Cookbook example DCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
                  4.3.2 Redbook example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
               4.4 Loading the data center model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
                  4.4.1 Tip for creating XML files using text editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
               4.5 Configuring the simulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
                  4.5.1 Data center model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
                  4.5.2 The tdnetworks file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
               4.6 Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

               Chapter 5. Demonstration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
               5.1 Introduction to ITITO and the scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
                  5.1.1 ITITO: A quick overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
               5.2 Data center assets and resources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
                  5.2.1 Show the switch fabric and inventory resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
                  5.2.2 Show the customer the resource pools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
               5.3 Customer applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
               5.4 Real-time performance monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

               Appendix A. Additional material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
               Locating the Web material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
               Using the Web material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
                  System requirements for downloading the Web material . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
                  How to use the Web material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120



iv   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
Related publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
IBM Redbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Product manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Online resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
How to get IBM Redbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Help from IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123




                                                                                               Contents        v
vi   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
Notices

This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.

IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in other countries. Consult
your local IBM representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area.
Any reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM
product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that
does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is the user's
responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service.

IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this document.
The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license
inquiries, in writing, to:
IBM Director of Licensing, IBM Corporation, North Castle Drive Armonk, NY 10504-1785 U.S.A.

The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such provisions
are inconsistent with local law: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES
THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT,
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer
of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.

This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made
to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may
make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at
any time without notice.

Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any
manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the
materials for this IBM product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.

IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without
incurring any obligation to you.

Information concerning non-IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of those products, their published
announcements or other publicly available sources. IBM has not tested those products and cannot confirm
the accuracy of performance, compatibility or any other claims related to non-IBM products. Questions on
the capabilities of non-IBM products should be addressed to the suppliers of those products.

This information contains examples of data and reports used in daily business operations. To illustrate them
as completely as possible, the examples include the names of individuals, companies, brands, and products.
All of these names are fictitious and any similarity to the names and addresses used by an actual business
enterprise is entirely coincidental.

COPYRIGHT LICENSE:
This information contains sample application programs in source language, which illustrates programming
techniques on various operating platforms. You may copy, modify, and distribute these sample programs in
any form without payment to IBM, for the purposes of developing, using, marketing or distributing application
programs conforming to the application programming interface for the operating platform for which the
sample programs are written. These examples have not been thoroughly tested under all conditions. IBM,
therefore, cannot guarantee or imply reliability, serviceability, or function of these programs. You may copy,
modify, and distribute these sample programs in any form without payment to IBM for the purposes of
developing, using, marketing, or distributing application programs conforming to IBM's application
programming interfaces.



© Copyright IBM Corp. 2004. All rights reserved.                                                           vii
Trademarks
The following terms are trademarks of the International Business Machines Corporation in the United States,
other countries, or both:

   AIX®                                ibm.com®                              RS/6000®
   DB2 Universal Database™             OS/390®                               Tivoli®
   DB2®                                Redbooks™                             WebSphere®
   IBM®                                Redbooks (logo)       ™               z/OS®

The following terms are trademarks of other companies:

Intel, Intel Inside (logos), and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States, other
countries, or both.

Microsoft, Windows, and the Windows logo are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States,
other countries, or both.

Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun
Microsystems, Inc. in the United States, other countries, or both.

Other company, product, and service names may be trademarks or service marks of others.




viii    Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
Preface

                 IBM® has changed the provisioning paradigm from “just-in-case” to “just-in-time”
                 on demand provisioning with IBM Tivoli® Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator
                 (ITITO) and IBM Tivoli Provisioning Manager, for managing resource information
                 and enhancing automation.

                 IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator and IBM Tivoli Provisioning
                 Manager automate the traditional manual provisioning process, performance
                 measurement, capacity planning, and infrastructure deployment. IBM Tivoli
                 Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator operates in a closed loop that performs
                 automatic resource requirements prediction, based on predefined service level
                 objectives and agreements, and automates infrastructure deployment. This
                 just-in-time cycle ensures that each application has the resource it needs, when
                 it needs it — without static over provisioning.

                 The primary objective of this IBM Redpaper is to provide step-by-step
                 instructions about how to set up a stand-alone IBM Tivoli provisioning solution
                 environment to be used for demonstrating the functions and features of the
                 products, using customer data and mapping customer infrastructure and
                 workloads.

                 General knowledge is assumed of communication network architecture and
                 design, network security architecture and design, data center environment
                 infrastructure and operations, Java™ and XML coding, database and Web
                 application servers.

                 This document is intended to be read and used by pre-sales systems engineers
                 and services personnel to build customized demonstrations of the IBM Tivoli
                 Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator. A significant amount of knowledge of
                 ITITO is expected, and the reader should ideally have attended the ITITO basic
                 and advanced training classes.

                 The reader should be familiar with the following topics:
                     XML and XML concepts
                     Network topologies
                     Switch, router, firewall, and load balancer configuration
                     Software packaging
                     Distributed systems architectures and configuration

                 This Redpaper is a valuable addition to and can be read in conjunction with the
                 existing product documentation. See the following recommended reading.



© Copyright IBM Corp. 2004. All rights reserved.                                                   ix
Recommended reading
               The publications listed in this section are considered particularly suitable for a
               more detailed discussion of the topics covered in this Redpaper.

               Product manuals:
                  IBM Tivoli Intelligent Orchestrator and Tivoli Provisioning Manager Release
                  Notes, SC32-1422
                  IBM Tivoli Intelligent Orchestrator and Tivoli Provisioning Manager Operator’s
                  Guide, SC32-1421
                  IBM Tivoli Intelligent Orchestrator and Tivoli Provisioning Manager Installation
                  Guide, SC32-1420
                  IBM Tivoli Provisioning Manager and Intelligent Orchestrator Overview Guide,
                  SC32-1419

               Online resources:
                  IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator Product Web page:
                  http://www.ibm.com/software/tivoli/products/intell-orch/
                  IBM Tivoli Provisioning Manager Product Web page:
                  http://www.ibm.com/software/tivoli/products/prov-mgr/


               IBM Redbooks™:
                  Provisioning On Demand: Introducing IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic
                  Orchestrator, SG24-8888
                  http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/redbooks/pdfs/sg248888.pdf
                  IBM Web Infrastructure Orchestration, SG24-7003
                  http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/redbooks/pdfs/sg247003.pdf



The team that wrote this Redpaper
               This Redpaper was produced by a team of specialists from around the world
               working at the International Technical Support Organization, Austin Center.

               Edson Manoel is a Software Engineer at IBM Corporation, International
               Technical Support Organization, Austin Center, working as an IT Specialist in the
               Systems Management area. Prior to joining the ITSO, Edson worked in the IBM
               Software Group as a Tivoli Technology Ambassador and within IBM Brazil
               Professional Services Organization as a Certified IT Specialist. He was involved
               in numerous projects, such as designing and implementing systems


x   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
management solutions for IBM customers and Business Partners. Edson holds a
        bachelor’s degree in Applied Mathematics from Universidade de Sao Paulo,
        Brazil.

        Tony French is a Tivoli Services Consultant in the U.K. He has 21 years of
        experience in the IT industry, including six years experience in Tivoli Software.
        His areas of expertise include IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator,
        IBM Tivoli Business Systems Manager, and the Tivoli Framework suite of
        products. He has written extensively about IBM Tivoli Business Systems
        Manager.

        Thanks to the following people for their contributions to this project:
        Morten Moeller           ITSO Austin Center
        Sara C. Brumfield        ITITO Level 2 Support, IBM Software Group
        Theo Winkelmann          On Demand Sales Enablement, IBM Software Group
        Leonard Hand             Senior Consulting I/T Architect, IBM Global eBusiness
                                 Solution Center



Become a published author
        Join us for a two- to six-week residency program! Help write an IBM Redbook
        dealing with specific products or solutions, while getting hands-on experience
        with leading-edge technologies. You'll team with IBM technical professionals,
        Business Partners and/or customers.

        Your efforts will help increase product acceptance and customer satisfaction. As
        a bonus, you'll develop a network of contacts in IBM development labs, and
        increase your productivity and marketability.

        Find out more about the residency program, browse the residency index, and
        apply online at:
              ibm.com/redbooks/residencies.html



Comments welcome
        Your comments are important to us!

        We want our papers to be as helpful as possible. Send us your comments about
        this Redpaper or other Redbooks in one of the following ways:
           Use the online Contact us review redbook form found at:
              ibm.com/redbooks



                                                                                  Preface   xi
Send your comments in an Internet note to:
                      redbook@us.ibm.com
                   Mail your comments to:
                      IBM Corporation, International Technical Support Organization
                      Dept. JN9B Building 003 Internal Zip 2834
                      11400 Burnet Road
                      Austin, Texas 78758-3493




xii   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
1


    Chapter 1.   Introduction
                 This document describes a method to build a customized demonstration of IBM
                 Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator (ITITO) for any customer. It is
                 expected that such a task can be achieved over a period of three working days,
                 consisting of the following major activities:

                 Planning
                     Interviewing the customer and the customer’s technical specialists to
                     determine which of the customer’s applications are suitable to be automated
                     with ITITO and the nature and extent of the components that make up these
                     applications.
                     Negotiating with the customer to remove components that are either not
                     necessary to demonstrate the product or would be too time-consuming to
                     build.

                 Data center modeling
                     Some discussion of the software tools that might be useful.
                     Installation instructions for installing the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic
                     Orchestrator management servers on Microsoft® Windows® Server 2000.
                     Using the information gathered in the interviews to create a data center model
                     definition in XML format for loading into ITITO.
                     Some examples of data center elements that can be used as templates.




© Copyright IBM Corp. 2004. All rights reserved.                                                        1
Guidance on configuring the ITITO simulator for the customized data center
                  model.

               Demonstration
                  Guidelines demonstrating the key features of the ITITO product.
                   Provisioning and orchestrating, including:
                   – Data center assets and resources
                   – Customer applications
                   – Real-time performance monitoring




2   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
2


    Chapter 2.   Planning
                 In this chapter, we discuss the planning required to build a customized
                 demonstration of ITITO. Planning typically involves interviewing the customer to
                 obtain a fairly detailed audit of the environment that they would like to automate
                 with ITITO. Obviously, the customer’s expectations and requirements are often
                 significantly greater than can be achieved in the time frame usually permitted to
                 build a demonstration, so the planning process should involve negotiations to
                 reveal elements of the customer’s requirements. This chapter contains some
                 guidelines to help in this area.




© Copyright IBM Corp. 2004. All rights reserved.                                                  3
2.1 Interviews
               To demonstrate to a customer how ITITO can be used in their environments, it is
               necessary to conduct a number of interviews with various specialists. Building an
               ITITO data center model can require a detailed level of information including, for
               example, MAC addresses and information about which ports on the network
               switch to which each network interface card (NIC) connects. For the purposes of
               a demonstration, however, it is not strictly necessary to gather the finest detail,
               but it may be advisable so that any subsequent Proof of Concepts (POC) project
               has a head start.

               The initial interviews should determine if the customer has any applications that
               are suitable for automating with ITITO and selecting a number that can be used
               to build the demonstration system. We recommend that at least two applications,
               but no more than four, be selected to build the demonstration.



2.2 General questions
               During the initial interview with the customer, these questions may be useful to
               gain an overview of the customer’s environment and operating practices:
               1. Does the customer have any applications that use clusters of similar servers
                  to provide a service?

                    Tip: If the customer has mainly mainframe-based computing and is not
                    planning to change to a distributed architecture, they are not an ideal
                    candidate. ITITO fits very well for applications that support horizontal
                    scaling (that is, Web, application servers).

               2. Do the servers in these clusters run single applications or many?

                    Tip: If the customer runs more than one application in each server, this
                    application might not be suitable for automation by ITITO.

               3. Typically, how many servers make up these clusters?
               4. Do these clusters of servers use load balancers or application servers to
                  control the utilization of each server?
               5. Does the customer provide sufficient servers to meet peak loads? What is the
                  average utilization of the servers in these application clusters?
               6. How does the customer plan for peak loads (for example, year-end
                  accounting, special promotions, or sales)? Does the customer:


4   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
– Wait for the load to materialize and then take action as above?
   – Build extra servers for each application and incorporate these into the
     clusters?
   – Do nothing? (Longer response times at peak times are normal!)
7. How does the customer handle peak loads in their applications? Does the
   customer:
   – Have a number of extra servers dedicated to each application?
   – Reconfigure other application servers?
   – Have a spare pool of servers that can be built to order?
8. When the peak loads subside, does the customer:
   – Return any servers that were added to the application cluster to their
     previous state?
   – Leave the servers in place for the next peak?
9. If the customer returns servers to their previous state, how long does this
   typically take?
10.Do the customer’s applications have peak loads at different times?
11.Could the customer conceivably use servers that are idle for one application
   in another application that is undergoing a peak load?
12.Does the customer maintain a large number of dedicated test servers for
   each application, or does the customer use a general pool of test servers?

    Tip: The more the better: ITITO provides a great starting point in a
    non-production environment and allows the customer to recover, redeploy,
    or eliminate redundant servers in the test environment.

13.Typically, what is the utilization of the test server environments?
14.Are the applications written in-house or are they 100% “shrink-wrapped” from
   the software vendor (that is, no customization)? Does the customer perform
   their own development and testing?

    Tip: ITITO can enhance the management and maintenance of customized
    or homegrown applications. If the customer has a 100% shrink-wrapped
    environment and rarely makes changes to their production/staging
    environments, they are less qualified as a prospective customer.

15.Does the customer operate applications over multiple data centers?
16.Does the customer have control over their network environment, or is it
   outsourced to a network provider?




                                                            Chapter 2. Planning   5
Tip: If the customer’s network is totally outsourced, they might not have
                    sufficient access to perform the dynamic reconfiguration that ITITO is
                    capable of providing.

               17.What are the customer’s predominant operating systems (for example, AIX®,
                  Solaris, HP/UX, Microsoft Windows, or Linux)?

                    Tip: If the customer uses mainly OS/390® or non UNIX®/Intel® operating
                    systems, they might be less qualified as a prospect.

               18.Does the customer have any blade servers? If so which types/makes (HP,
                  IBM, and so on)?
               19.How many and what type of network switches is the customer using (that is,
                  Cisco, Extreme, Foundry, and so on)?

                    Tip: Our application is better suited for Level 3 (network layer) switches,
                    but we can also work with Level 2 (data layer) switches.

               20.What level of redundancy is provided for at the network equipment level, if
                  any?
               21.What type of network and systems management software is the customer
                  using (OpenView, Tivoli, CA UniCenter, and so on)?

                    Tip: Helps determine the level of sophistication present in the network
                    operations center.

               22.What kind of storage infrastructure is in place (that is, Storage Area Network,
                  or SAN, Network Attached Storage, Redundant Array of Independent Disks,
                  or RAID)?
               23.What are the customer’s dominant relational database management systems
                  (Oracle, DB2®, Microsoft SQL Server, MySQL, or other)? And, are clustered
                  database solutions being used?
               24.What is the application server software, if any (WebSphere®, Weblogic,
                  Resin, Jboss, or other)?

               The ideal outcome of these questions is to locate two to four applications that
               have the following characteristics:
                  Clustered architecture




6   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
A low average utilization with idle servers available for peak demand
           Or,
           A pool of spare servers that are provisioned for peak demand
           Use similar hardware and operating system platforms
           Operate in a network that the customer has control over

        Alternatively, if the customer wants to provision application test environments
        from a pool of common servers rather than maintain separate test environments
        for each application, ITITO can be a suitable tool for this, too.

        The following table can be used to collect and summarize the data from these
        questions:

        Table 2-1 Capturing customer planning information skeleton
         Applic-         #        Operating       #           #         Avg.         #
          ation       Servers     systems       Web         Data-       util       Spare
                                               servers      bases        %        servers




2.3 ITITO components
        After a limited number of suitable applications are identified, it is necessary to
        gather additional technical details in order to build an ITITO data center model.
        To simplify the data center model building, these components have been broken
        down into the following categories:
           Power units
           Network configuration
           Software configuration
           Spare pools
           Customers, applications, and clusters
           Other devices

        The following sections contain tables showing the required attributes that need to
        be collected for each component type. The shaded cells in these tables are for
        additional data that is not essential for a demonstration but is necessary for a full
        ITITO build or Proof of Concept.




                                                                     Chapter 2. Planning    7
2.3.1 Power units
               For the purposes of a demonstration, power units are optional in ITITO. It is
               possible to define the power units and to associate devices with these power
               units. It is also possible to manage the power units through an IP connection. For
               a demonstration, it will usually only be necessary to collect the names of the units
               for later reference by other devices:

               Table 2-2 Power units data collection skeleton
                 Power unit name        Manufacturer            Model           Device model




                Note: The only devices that are supported by Version 1.1 of ITITO are as
                follows:

               Table 2-3 Power units data collection example
                      Manufacturer               Model                  Device model

                APC                       7901                  APC-7901-SNMP

                APC                       9606                  APC-9606-SNMP


                Note: It is also possible to define network interface cards (NICs) on a power
                unit and associate it with a port on a network switch, but it was found that the
                data center model would not load if this were done. However, it is possible to
                define the interface from the ITITO GUI.


2.3.2 Network configuration
               The ITITO network configuration consists of the following main components:
                  Switch fabric
                  Subnetworks
                  Switches
                  Load balancers
                  Virtual IPs
                  Access control lists (ACLs)

               Each of the main components is addressed separately.

               Most devices in ITITO require a number of service access points that define the
               mechanisms and authentication information (user IDs and passwords) that are
               used to communicate with the device. For a demonstration, these are not



8   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
required. However, if the customer is willing to provide this information, and if the
demonstration is likely to lead to a Proof of Concept or implementation, the
information can be collected in advance. This is addressed in the last segment of
this section.

Switch fabric
The switch fabric is an ITITO concept. For most customers, it will normally only
be necessary to define one switch fabric. All that is needed is the name of the
fabric. The customers name is recommended to be included here. This name will
be used in a number of other components later.

Table 2-4 Switch fabric data collection skeleton
 Switch fabric name




Subnetworks
Every subnet in use by the applications defined in Section 2.2 on page 4 must be
defined to ITITO. In addition, the VLAN that is associated with the subnet must
be recorded.

Table 2-5 Subnet data collection skeleton
    Subnet address                Netmask                       VLAN




It is possible to define a name for each subnetwork, but we recommend that this
not be specified so that the name defaults to the subnet address, because this is
easier to understand while using the GUI.

When ITITO is used to provision servers, it can assign an IP address to a new
server from the next available within a subnet. In this way, ITITO acts in a similar
way as a DHCP server, although technically, it assigns a permanent address.
For subnets where ITITO is permitted to assign addresses, it will usually be
necessary to block certain addresses. Otherwise, ITITO will assign a duplicate
address. In particular, each subnet will have a gateway address that should be
blocked, and any permanent servers on the subnet should also be blocked. A
number of ranges can be defined if necessary.




                                                             Chapter 2. Planning    9
Subnet address           Blocked range start                 Blocked range end




               Switches
               Each network switch device that is used by the applications determined in
               Section 2.2 on page 4 should be recorded here:

               Table 2-6 Switch data collection skeleton
                 Switch                                      IP      Switch
                            Manufacturer      Model                                Device model
                 name                                      address   fabric




               Switches often have separate modules containing a number of ports. Every port
               that connects a device in the ITITO environment must be defined here and will be
               used later in the device definitions. It is not necessary to define every port on
               every switch, just the ones to be controlled by ITITO.

               Table 2-7 Switch port data collection skeleton
                 Switch name      Switch modules       Switch port       VLAN           Port type




               The valid types of ports for ITITO Version 1.1 are:
                  Ethernet
                  Fast Ethernet
                  Gigabyte


10   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
VLAN
   Unknown

It is not essential to define the port types, because this does not affect the
demonstration, although the ports will show up as unknown type in the GUI.

If any switch is connected to any of the power units identified in 2.3.1, “Power
units” on page 8, the attached power unit should be recorded here:

Table 2-8 Switch/power units data collection
     Switch name                  Power unit                  Power outlet




The following switches are supported by ITITO Version 1.1:

Table 2-9 Switch data collection example
  Manufacturer            Model                          Device model

 Cisco             6500                 Cisco 6500 Switches Hybrid Mode

 Cisco             6500                 Cisco 6500 Switches Native IOS Mode

 Cisco             3548                 Cisco 3548

 Cisco             2621                 Cisco 2621

 IBM               Blade Center         Blade Center 4p GB Eth
                   4port GB

 Extreme           48i                  Extreme 48i

 Foundry           Foundry Switch       Foundry Switch

 Others            Dummy Switch         Dummy Switch

If the customer has other switches than these, it will be necessary to code
custom device drivers during any Proof of Concept or implementation.
Fortunately, for a demonstration, it is only necessary to use the dummy switch
device model for all devices. This allows the switch operations to be simulated
during the demonstration.

Routers and firewalls
Routers are defined as switches in ITITO, but they also require network
interfaces, route definitions, and access control lists.




                                                              Chapter 2. Planning   11
The basic definition table for a router is as follows:

               Table 2-10 Router data collection skeleton
                Router                                                Switch     Device
                           Manufacturer      Model     IP address                            Firewall
                name                                                  fabric     model



               Routers will usually have a number of interfaces that control the routing between
               subnets. The data required for these components is as follows:

               Table 2-11 Router interface data collection skeleton
                  Router name       Interface name          IP address                Managed




               Each interface can support a number of routes, which need to be specified in the
               following table:

               Table 2-12 Router interface route data collection skeleton
                  Router name         Interface name         Route          Gateway          ACL




               The following router is a valid device in ITITO Version 1.1:

               Table 2-13 Router information data collection example
                    Manufacturer                 Model                        Device model

                Cisco                     2621                   Cisco 2621


               Access control lists
               For each router or firewall that controls traffic between subnetworks, an access
               control list (ACL) should be defined. These appear on the GUI as a distinctive
               icon that connects subnetworks. Each ACL can have multiple rules that are
               unidirectional. Usually at least two rules will be defined, permitting traffic in both
               directions between a pair of subnets.




12   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
Table 2-14 Access Control List data collection skeleton
  ACL name       Rule #     Target       Source subnet        Destination subnet




The Target column contains the operational mode of the rule: either permit or
deny.

Each rule can specify protocols or port ranges to permit or deny, but for the
purposes of a demonstration, this should not be necessary.

Load balancers
Load balancers require the following information to enable them to be defined to
ITITO:

Table 2-15 Load balancer data collection sample
   Name       Manufacturer           Model         Type           Device model



The following load balancers are valid devices in ITITO Version 1.1:

Table 2-16 Load balancer data collection example
 Manufacturer         Model            Device model                  Type

 Cisco            11000              Cisco CSS             arrowpoint-load-balancer

 Alteon           LoadBalancer       Alteon LoadBalancer

                  Dummy LB           Dummy LB

Each load balancer can have existing virtual IP addresses defined to it. When
ITITO is operational, it will create and delete virtual IPs as it provisions servers
into application clusters on demand.

Load balancers can also be used as switches. In this case, they will need to be
defined as switches in “Switches” on page 10.




                                                             Chapter 2. Planning      13
Virtual IPs
               Any pre-existing virtual IPs can be defined to ITITO if required, although they will
               usually take no part in the demonstration. The information required is shown in
               the following table:

               Table 2-17 Virtual IP data collection skeleton
                 Virtual IP     Load        Virtual IP       First input     Last input     Output
                   name        balancer     address         port in range   port in range    port




               Each application cluster (see 2.3.5, “Applications and customers” on page 16)
               that ITITO is to provision automatically will need a unique virtual IP definition for
               the cluster.


2.3.3 Software
               Software configuration in ITITO is divided into three categories:
                  Software package
                  Software patch
                  Software stack

               We address each of these in the following sections.

               Software package
               Each single piece of software or data that the customer’s applications require to
               be provisioned must be defined to ITITO as a software object. This typically
               includes operating systems, databases, middleware, applications, data, and so
               on.

               For each software package that is to be automatically deployed, it is necessary
               to collect the following information:

               Table 2-18 Software package data collection skeleton
                 Software name         Version       Type       Package path         Install path




14   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
There are two valid entries for type:
   OPERATING_SYSTEM
   SOFTWARE

For the purposes of the demonstration, package and install paths are optional.

Software patches
Software patches are optional for the demonstration. If any patches or service
packs are required by the customer, they need the following basic information for
the demonstration:

Table 2-19 Software patch data collection skeleton
  Patch name            Type              Package path            Install path




As with the software packages, package path and install path are optional for a
demonstration.

Software stacks
Software stacks are an ITITO concept to group together a number of software
packages and software patches so that the stack represents all of the software
that must be installed on each type of server when it is provisioned into an
application cluster. Each distinct type of server required by any application
cluster needs a corresponding software stack. In addition, if any spare pool has
to have an initial set of software defined, the software stack should be defined for
this state, too. Typically, this could mean that a base operating system is
installed on servers in a spare pool with no applications.

Software stacks require the following information:

Table 2-20 Software stack data collection skeleton
    Software stack name             Software product               Position




The software stack names must match the software products or patches, or both,
defined in the previous sections. The Position column determines the installation
order.



                                                           Chapter 2. Planning   15
2.3.4 Spare pools
               If the customer has pools of spare servers already available for their applications,
               information about the names, connections, and types of these machines needs
               to be determined and entered in the following tables. If the customer does not
               have any existing pools of machines, for the demonstration, a number of servers
               will need to be defined to create a spare pool. The customer should be advised
               that this is a fundamental principle behind ITITO.

               These pools require the following definitions:

               Table 2-21 Spare pool network data collection skeleton
                  Spare pool name                            VLAN                                       Switch fabric



               Any number of servers can be defined for each pool with the following attributes:

               Table 2-22 Spare pool data collection skeleton




                                                                         switch module
                                            interface card




                                                                         Connected to



                                                                                         Connected to
                              Server name




                                                                                         switch port
                 Spare pool




                                                             Connected




                                                                                                          IP address




                                                                                                                                 MAC addr.
                                                                                                                       Managed
                                                             to switch
                                            Network
                 name




               For ITITO to operate correctly with pooled servers, we strongly advise that each
               server has at least two network interface cards (NICs), one of which is dedicated
               to the management LAN. If any NIC has multiple IP addresses, these should be
               recorded here, too.

               MAC addresses are optional for the demonstration, but will show up as unknown
               in the GUI if not specified.


2.3.5 Applications and customers
               In this section, it is necessary to gather information about the various
               applications that a customer wants to provision with ITITO. The basic data




16   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
required is shown in the following table. For a demonstration, at least two
applications should be defined.

Table 2-23 Customer/application data collection skeleton
       Customer name or
                                        Application      Priority           Application cluster
         business unit




Each ITITO implementation can have many customers defined, each of which
can have multiple applications, each of which can have multiple application
clusters. An application cluster is defined to be a set of servers that provide the
same service to an application. The servers are expected to be virtual clones of
each other. The priority of each application should be set according to the
following table:

Table 2-24 Application priority data collection example
     Service plan                   Priority                        Interpretation

 Platinum                                         Better priority service

 Gold                                             Medium priority service

 Silver                   10                      Poorer priority service

Each application cluster requires the following additional definitions:

Table 2-25 Cluster information data collection skeleton
  Application




                                                                                   Virtual IP



                                                                                                Managed
                                                                       balancer
                servers



                          servers
  cluster




                                                Switch
                                                fabric
                                         VLAN




                                                                       Load
                          Max.




                                                            Pool
                Min.




                                                                        Chapter 2. Planning               17
In this table, Pool is the server pool from which the application cluster provisions
               and returns servers (resource pool). Each application cluster can be managed or
               unmanaged. This value should be set to true or false. If the cluster is
               unmanaged, ITITO will make no attempt to provision servers for this cluster.
               Typically, this option is used for clusters that provide database facilities. It is
               usually desirable to show these clusters in the ITITO GUI, but not to actually
               make changes to them automatically. The Load Balancer column is used to
               identify the load balancer that is associated with the cluster’s servers. The Virtual
               IP column refers to the virtual IPs defined in “Virtual IPs” on page 14.

                Note: It is also possible to configure the service level agreement properties:
                maximum response time and maximum time available. We recommend that
                you talk about this during the demonstration.

               If any cluster has any dedicated servers assigned to it (and usually there will be
               at least one), these must also be defined. The data required for these is shown in
               the following table:

               Table 2-26 Cluster network data collection skeleton
                 Application




                                                              Connected


                                                                          Connected



                                                                                      Connected




                                                                                                  IP address
                                                    Managed




                                                              to switch


                                                                          to switch



                                                                                      to switch
                                        interface
                                        Network




                                                                                                               address
                                                                          module
                 cluster


                               Server
                               name




                                                                                                               MAC
                                        card




                                                                                      port




               For servers that are permanently assigned to a cluster, the network interface
               cards should usually not be managed by ITITO. As with pool servers, the MAC
               addresses are optional, but will show up as unknown in the GUI if not specified.




18   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
2.3.6 Other devices
           ITITO supports a number of other data center management devices including:
              Boot servers
              Terminal servers
              Blade center management servers

           These devices might be essential for the operation of a data center, but do not
           really play any part in a demonstration of ITITO. If it is desirable to show the
           configuration and that the product supports these devices, they should be
           included.

           Boot servers
           If any servers are to be provisioned by bare-metal builds, it will be necessary to
           define a boot server for each set of servers that are configured to use the same
           boot server. Boot servers require the following information to be defined:

           Table 2-27 Boot server data collection skeleton
             Name       Manufacturer              Software          IP address                    Device model



           Each boot server can also have a network interface card and network interfaces
           as with other servers in spare pools and clusters:

           Table 2-28 Boot server network information collection skeleton
                                      Connected



                                                    Connected



                                                                Connected




                                                                               IP address




                                                                                                                  MAC addr.
                                                                                                    Managed
                                      to switch



                                                    to switch



                                                                to switch
                       interface
                       Network




                                                    module
            server
            name
            Boot




                       card




                                                                port




           The following boot servers are valid devices in ITITO Version 1.1:

           Table 2-29 Boot servers supported by ITITO V1.1
             Manufacturer                         Software                                   Device model

            Rembo                  Auto-Deploy                              Rembo Boot Server

            IBM                    Remote Deployment Manager                RDM Server




                                                                                            Chapter 2. Planning               19
IBM                     Network Installation Manager            NIM Server

                IBM                     zVM Boot Server                         zVM Boot Server

                IBM                     Cluster Systems Management              CSM Management Server

                Sun                     Jump Start                              JumpStart Server

                HP                      Rapid Deployment Pack                   RDP Server

               If a boot server is used to deploy an operating system, this attribute can be
               added to the corresponding software stack for the operating system. This is
               optional for the demonstration.

               Table 2-30 Boot server/operating system data collection skeleton
                           Software stack name                                     Boot server




               Terminal servers
               Terminal servers can be defined to ITITO like boot servers except that there are
               no supplied device drivers for terminal servers in Version 1.1 of the product:

               Table 2-31 Terminal server data collection skeleton
                                   Name                                             IP address




               Network interface cards and network interfaces can be defined as with other
               servers:

               Table 2-32 Terminal server network information data collection skeleton
                                            Connected



                                                        Connected



                                                                    Connected




                                                                                   IP address




                                                                                                          MAC addr.
                                                                                                Managed
                                            to switch



                                                        to switch



                                                                    to switch
                            interface
                Terminal



                            Network




                                                        module
                server
                name



                            card




                                                                    port




20   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
Blade center management servers
Each blade system is managed by a central management server that controls all
aspects of the blade servers. ITITO uses the blade center management server to
perform operations on the blade servers such as reboot, power on, and
reconfiguration. If the customer uses blade servers, it might be desirable to show
the blade center management server, although the demonstration will make no
visible changes to the blade center management server itself. The blade center
management server can be defined like the boot server and terminal servers:

Table 2-33 Blade center management server data collection skeleton
  Name         Manufacturer              Software          IP address                    Device model




The following blade systems have device drivers in Version 1.1 of ITITO:

Table 2-34 Blade center management servers supported by ITITO V1.1
    Manufacturer                     Blade system                                 Device model

 RLX Technologies       ServerBlades                            RLX Blade Server

 HP                     Proliant Blade Servers                  Proliant BL Server

Network interface cards and network interfaces can also be defined if required:

Table 2-35 Blade server network information data collection skeleton
                         Connected



                                        Connected



                                                    Connected




                                                                    IP address




                                                                                                       MAC addr.
                         to Switch




                                                                                         Managed
                                        to switch



                                                    to switch
            interface
            Network




                                        module
 server
 Blade

 name



            card




                                                    port




Servers in spare pools or in clusters can be associated with the relevant blade
center management server. This information can be appended to servers in the
relevant spare pools and clusters:




                                                                                 Chapter 2. Planning               21
Table 2-36 Blade servers data collection skeleton
                  Server name            Blade admin server                   Blade slot




2.3.7 Scoping
               This section discusses the process of settling the scope of the demonstration.
               This should be agreed with the customer prior to beginning work on the
               development of the demonstration system.

               The main objective of a customized demonstration is to show the customer what
               ITITO can do for them in their environment. It will not usually be necessary to
               show the full extent of their environment, and indeed, could be
               counter-productive if attempted. From the data gathered, a representative
               sample of components should be chosen to be used in the demonstration. For
               example, if a customer has an application that has 100 servers working as a
               cluster, it is only really necessary to show a few.

               Also, if a customer has platforms that are not ideal for ITITO such as Tandems or
               z/OS®, it would be better to focus on the ones that are.

               Ultimately, if two applications can be agreed on with one, two, or three clusters in
               each and one to five servers for each cluster, the demonstration should be
               feasible, representative, and worthwhile.

               Provided with this document and included in the text is an XML file that contains
               the following:
                  One customer
                  Two applications
                  Two clusters in each application
                  One dedicated server in each cluster
                  One common resource pool
                  One switch
                  One router
                  One load balancer
                  Three software stacks
                  Six software packages

               This should be sufficient to demonstrate the key features of ITITO and could
               perhaps be used simply by changing the names of the applications clusters and
               pools to the customers’ own names.


22   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
The files provided with this document are described in 4.3, “Sample XML files” on
page 91.




                                                         Chapter 2. Planning   23
24   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
3


    Chapter 3.   Installing the demonstration
                 systems
                 This chapter describes the installation procedures to get IBM Tivoli Intelligent
                 ThinkDynamic Orchestrator installed for our pre-POC demonstration scenario.
                 Our installation consists of two servers, one hosting an IBM DB2 database server
                 and LDAP Directory, and the second being the IBM Tivoli Intelligent
                 ThinkDynamic Orchestrator server. This is considered a typical two server
                 scenario.

                 In the case of a two server installation, as described in this chapter, both servers
                 must be running the same operating system. In this chapter, we provide
                 instructions for installing IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator on
                 Microsoft Windows 2000 Server.

                 The instructions given in this chapter are very detailed and explicit. These
                 instructions are not the only way to install IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic
                 Orchestrator and its related prerequisites, and are meant to be followed to
                 successfully install and set up a IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator
                 environment.




© Copyright IBM Corp. 2004. All rights reserved.                                                  25
3.1 Installation process overview
               Our installation scenario is to be considered as an example only. The following
               are the names of both servers used during the installation process. These names
               most likely should be changed to the naming standards of the customer.
                  The server hosting both the IBM DB2 Server and the IBM Directory server will
                  be named TIOdbsrv.
                  The server hosting the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator
                  server will be named TIOsrv.

               The following table provides the recommended hardware for each server. This is
               the hardware we used in the ITSO lab environment and we recommend it as a
               minimum configuration.

                Note: The values provided in the following table may differ form the
                information provided in the IBM Tivoli Intelligent Orchestrator and Tivoli
                Provisioning Manager Release Notes, SC32-1422. They represent the
                hardware used at the time of writing this Redpaper and serve as our
                recommendation for a minimum of a two server configuration.

               Table 3-1 Recommended hardware for Windows 2000 Server
                IBM Compatible Server:

                2.4 GHz Intel Pentium® processor or equivalent

                2GB RAM

                30 GB disk

               The following table provides a list of the various products that will need to be
               installed and configured on each server during the installation procedure per
               operating system. Please note that both servers must be running the same
               operating system.

               Table 3-2 Required software - Windows 2000
                TIOdbsrv                                   TIOsrv

                Windows 2000 Server                        Windows 2000 Server

                Cygwin Version 1.3.22 – or later           Cygwin Version 1.3.22 – or later

                IBM DB2 Universal Database™                IBM DB2 Universal Database V8.1.2 Client
                Workgroup Unlimited Edition V8.1.2

                IBM Directory Server, V5.1                 IBM Directory Server V5.1 Client




26   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
TIOdbsrv                                                            TIOsrv

                                                                     IBM WebSphere Application Server Base
                                                                     Edition V5.0.1

                                                                     IBM WebSphere Application Server Base
                                                                     Edition V5.0.1 Client

                                                                     IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic
                                                                     Orchestrator V1.1.0

The following picture provides an overview of the entire installation process and
can be used as reference during the installation.


    Phase 1                Define the User IDs
   Define user tioadmin user ID with Administrator / root authority on both servers
   Define user tioldap user ID with Administrator / root authority on both servers
   UNIX only: define the mqm user ID in the mqm group. Also create mqbrkrs group                               TIO              TIO
   and ensure that tioadmin, root and mqm users IDs belongs to it.
                                                                                                            Database           Server
                                                                                                             Server




    Phase 2               Prepare SSH communications
  Install all the prerequisite packages for SSH communication between Servers (CygWin for
                                                                                                                       SSH
  Windows, openssh for AIX) on both Servers
  Configure SSH and generate a RSA key on the TIO Server                                                                         TIO
  Configure SSH on the TIO database Server                                                                                      Server
  Copy the RSA key to the TIO database Server                                                                  TIO
  Test SSH communication from the TIO Server to the TIO database Server                                     Database
  Repeat the process for all servers in the Data Center to be managed by IBM Tivoli Intelligent              Server
  ThinkDynamic Orchestrator



    Phase 3               Prepare the TIO database Server
                                                                                                                         Data source
                                                                                                                          LDAP DB
  Install the remaining prerequisite packages
  Install IBM DB2 Universal Database Workgroup Unlimited Edition V8.1.2
  Create the database to be used by IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator
  Populate the database using the provided tablesapce.sql file                                                               Central Data
                                                                                                               TIO           Warehouse
                                                                                                                               TIO DB
  Install IBM Directory Server, V5.1                                                                        Database
  Create the LDAP database and configure IBM Directory Server, V5.1 with the provided suffixes               Server
  and ldap.ldif file
  Verify the installation



    Phase 4               Prepare the TIO Server
                                                                                             Data source
                                                                                              LDAP DB
  Install the remaining prerequisite packages
  Install IBM DB2 Universal Database V8.12 Client
  Install IBM Directory Server V5.1 Client                                                                                       TIO
  Install IBM Websphere Application Server Base Edition V5.0                                                                    Server
                                                                                             Central Data
  Install IBM Websphere Application Server Base Edition V5.0 Fixpack 1                       Warehouse
                                                                                               TIO DB
                                                                                                               TIO
  Apply the MQ CSD03 patch to IBM Websphere                                                                 Database
  Apply the MQ fixes for embedded messaging to IBM WebSphere (IY43610 and IY44803)                           Server
  Install IBM Websphere Application Server Base Edition V5.0 Client
  Install IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator V1.1.0
  Verify the installation



Figure 3-1 ITITO installation overview




                                                     Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems                                        27
3.1.1 Recommended installation directories
               The following table provides a list of recommended installation directories for
               each product used during the installation process. Note that file paths containing
               spaces must not be used, as it will cause problems during the installation and
               configuration process.

               Table 3-3 Recommended installation directories
                Product                                     Installation Directory

                Cygwin Version 1.3.22                       c:cygwin

                IBM DB2 Universal Database Workgroup        c:IBMsqllib
                Unlimited Edition V8.1.2

                IBM Directory Server, V5.1                  c:IBMldap

                IBM DB2 Universal Database V8.12 Client     c:IBMsqllib

                IBM Directory Server V5.1 Client            c:IBMldap

                IBM WebSphere Application Server Base       c:IBMWebSphereAppServer
                Edition V5.0.1

                IBM WebSphere Application Server Base       c:IBMWebSphereAppClient
                Edition V5.0.1 Client

                IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic         c:cygwinhomethinkcontrol
                Orchestrator V1.1.0


3.1.2 User IDs and passwords
               The following table illustrates the user IDs that will be either created during the
               application install process or created by you, the implementer, before the actual
               install process begins.

               Table 3-4 User IDs and passwords
                User name         Password            Description               Comment

                tioadmin          <user defined>      Used to log onto the OS   This user ID must be
                                                      to install IBM Tivoli     created manually on
                                                      Intelligent               both servers prior to
                                                      ThinkDynamic              the installation
                                                      Orchestrator




28   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
User name     Password          Description                Comment

tioldap       <user defined>    Used by IBM Tivoli         This user ID must be
                                Intelligent                created manually on
                                ThinkDynamic               the machine hosting
                                Orchestrator to connect    the IBM Directory
                                to the Directory Server    Server prior to the
                                                           installation

tiodb         <user defined>    This user ID will be the   Created during the
                                instance owner of the      IBM DB2 installation
                                IBM Tivoli Intelligent     on the server hosting
                                ThinkDynamic               the IBM Tivoli
                                Orchestrator database      Intelligent
                                                           ThinkDynamic
                                                           Orchestrator
                                                           database

mqm           <user defined>    Used by WebSphere          This user ID must be
                                MQ                         created manually on
                                                           both servers prior to
                                                           the installation

wasadmin      wasadmin          Used by WebSphere as       Defined
                                administration account     automatically by the
                                                           WebSphere
                                                           installation process

tioappadmin   tioappadmin       This is the IBM Tivoli     Defined on the
                                Intelligent                Directory Server
                                ThinkDynamic               automatically by the
                                Orchestrator               IBM Tivoli Intelligent
                                superadmin and is used     ThinkDynamic
                                to log into the Web        Orchestrator
                                console                    installation process

tiointernal   internal          Used by IBM Tivoli         Defined on the
                                Intelligent                Directory Server
                                ThinkDynamic               automatically by the
                                Orchestrator for system    IBM Tivoli Intelligent
                                initiated actions          ThinkDynamic
                                                           Orchestrator
                                                           installation process

cn=root       <user defined>    root user ID for the IBM   Created during the
                                Directory LDAP Server      IBM Directory
                                                           installation process




                            Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems         29
3.2 Installing and configuring TIOdbsrv - Windows
               In this section we describe the steps to setup the machine hosting database and
               the LDAP directory used by the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator
               on Microsoft Windows 2000 Server. The high level install steps are presented in
               the following figure.


                Create tioadmin user
                          id



                Create tioldap user id



                Download and install
                     Cygwin


                Install and configure
                         DB2


                 Install and configure
                IBM Directory Server
               Figure 3-2 TIOdbsrv installation steps

               The following sections explain each step of the above flow in detail.


3.2.1 Creating the required user IDs
               Create a local user accounts tioadmin and tioldap as follows:
               1. Under Computer Management choose System Tools -> Local users and
                  groups -> Users and add the users tioadmin and tioldap.
               2. Select the newly created users and make both of them members of the
                  Administrators group.
               3. Select the user ID tioadmin and set its Local Path to:
                  C:Cygwinhomethinkcontrol
               4. Select the user ID tioldap and set its Local Path to:
                  C:IBMldap




30   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
3.2.2 Installing and configuring Cygwin
           Cygwin is used as an Open SSH environment for the IBM Tivoli Intelligent
           ThinkDynamic Orchestrator application to communicate with all other
           applications through the use of Cygwin’s BASH Shell and can be obtained at the
           following URL:
           http://www.cygwin.com/

           Ensure you are logged on to the TIOdbsrv machine using the tioadmin user
           account specified above.

            Attention: Cygwin Version 1.3.22 or higher must be installed. At the time of
            writing this Redpaper, Cygwin Version 1.5.5-1 was the current version
            available for downloading and it was used during our install process.



            Important: Before you download Cygwin ensure you are logged on using the
            tioadmin user account specified above and that the tioadmin user has the
            correct profile properties and is a member of Administrators.

           1. Open a browser and go the Cygwin home page: http://www.cygwin.com
              Select the Install or Update now! option.
           2. Choose to open the setup.exe application from its current location
           3. The Cygwin Setup window starts the installation wizard, select Next
           4. Select Install from Internet
           5. Accept default installation directory (C:Cygwin), All Users and DOS options
           6. Accept default Package directory
           7. Choose the appropriate internet settings. We selected Direct Connection.
           8. Select a FTP site from the available list
           9. During the Cygwin installation, on the Select Package panel, it is important to
              select the correct Categories. The installation wizard provides a series of
              pre-selected packages as default for installation. However, IBM Tivoli
              Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator requires additional packages under the
              Lib and Net categories. The following table describes the required packages
              that need to be installed in addition the default selection. To select those
              packages, click the + sign of the Libs and Net categories, and click the Skip
              button next to the desired package to change the installation option from Skip
              to Install.




                                             Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems   31
Tip: We recommend selecting and installing all of the Cygwin packages.


                Additional Cygwin packages

                Cygwin Package        Action

                Libs                  Accept default packages PLUS Regex

                Net                   Accept default packages PLUS OpenSSH and OpenSSL


               10.When the installation completes, select to create icon on desktop. Select
                  Finish.


3.2.3 Configuring SSH communications
               When the Cygwin installation completes click on the Cygwin icon to open a bash
               shell window and perform the following steps to configure SSH:

                Important: Verify that all servers in your configuration are setup correctly in
                either DNS and or /etc/hosts.

               1. Move to the /usr/bin directory and issue the host configuration ssh-host-config
                  command, as shown in the following example. When prompted for
                  environment variables, press Enter to accept the defaults.
                       $ cd /usr/bin
                       $ ./ssh-host-config -y
                       Generating /etc/ssh_host_key
                       Generating /etc/ssh_host_rsa_key
                       Generating /etc/ssh_host_dsa_key
                       Generating /etc/ssh_config file
                       Privilege separation is set to yes by default since OpenSSH 3.3.
                       However, this requires a non-privileged account called 'sshd'.
                       For more info on privilege separation read
                       /usr/doc/openssh/README.privsep.
                       Warning: The following function requires administrator privileges!
                       Generating /etc/sshd_config file
                       Added ssh to /cygdrive/c/WINNT/system32/drivers/etc/services
                       Added ssh to /etc/inetd.conf
                       Do you want to install sshd as service?
                       Which value should the environment variable CYGWIN have when
                       sshd starts? It's recommended to set at least "ntsec" to be
                       able to change user context without password.
                       Default is "binmode ntsec tty". CYGWIN=
                       The service has been installed under LocalSystem account.


32   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
Host configuration finished. Have fun!
2. Export the CYGWIN variable.
      $ export CYGWIN=ntsec

 Tip: This command will set an environment variable for products to reference
 as a global variable.

3. Move to the /var directory and change the attributes of the directory named
   empty.
      $ cd /var
      $ chmod 700 empty
4. Start the SSH service as follows:
      $ cygrunsrv -S sshd
5. Move to the home directory of the tioadmin user ID and issue the ssh-keygen
   command to generate the RSA key. You should have an output similar to the
   following example.
      $ cd
      $ pwd
      /home/thinkcontrol
      $ ssh-keygen -t rsa -N ""
      Generating public/private rsa key pair.
      Enter file in which to save the key (/home/thinkcontrol/.ssh/id_rsa):
      Created directory '/home/thinkcontrol/.ssh'.
      Your identification has been saved in /home/thinkcontrol/.ssh/id_rsa.
      Your public key has been saved in /home/thinkcontrol/.ssh/id_rsa.pub.
      The key fingerprint is:
      fd:ca:21:d3:3f:db:fd:d9:56:b2:30:68:16:43:1c:11 tioadmin@tio12
6. Move to the .ssh directory and create the authorized_keys file:
      $ pwd
      /home/thinkcontrol
      $ cd .ssh
      $ cat id_rsa.pub > authorized_keys
7. To configure SSH to accept connections from new hosts without prompting for
   confirmation, create a file in the /home/thinkcontrol/.ssh directory called
   config. Edit the config file and add the line StrictHostKeyChecking no as
   follows:
      # cd /home/thinkcontrol/.ssh
      # touch config
      # vi config
   Add in the following line:
      StrictHostKeyChecking no



                                 Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems   33
Type the config file. The output should read as follows:
                      StrictHostKeyChecking no
               8. To verify that SSH is configured properly, try to access your own machine
                  using the ssh command as shown in the following example.
                      $ ssh tioadmin@localhost
                      Warning: Permanently added 'localhost' (RSA) to the list of known hosts.
                      Fanfare!!!
                      You are successfully logged in to this server!!!
                      $ exit
                      logout
                      Connection to localhost closed.


3.2.4 Installing and configuring IBM DB2 UDB V8.1.2 on Windows
               This section describes the installation and configuration of IBM DB2 Universal
               Database, Workgroup Unlimited Edition V8.1.2 on Windows. It also shows the
               required configuration steps required by IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic
               Orchestrator.

                Note: Ensure you perform the IBM DB2 installation logged on as tioadmin.

               Use the DB2 installation media provided with the IBM Tivoli Intelligent
               ThinkDynamic Orchestrator product. This ensures that you get the correct
               version and level of DB2 installed.
               1. Logged on as tioadmin, move to the drive where the IBM DB2 CD is mounted
                  and run the setup.exe command to start the installation. From the installation
                  window, select Install Product.
               2. Select the product we want to install: IBM DB2 Workgroup Server Unlimited
                  Edition and click Next.
               3. The Welcome to the DB2 Setup wizard window opens. Click Next.
               4. Accept the License Agreement by selecting I accept the terms in the
                  license agreement option.
               5. The Select the installation type window opens. Select the Custom Install
                  option.
               6. Select Install DB2 Workgroup Server Unlimited Edition on this computer.
               7. The Select features window opens, as shown in the next figure. Select the
                  following packages:
                  – Client support
                  – Administration tools
                  – Server support


34   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
Also select the installation path. Ensure there are no spaces in the installation
   path. We used C:IBMSQLLIB.




Figure 3-3 Select DB2 Server components

8. Choose Language of choice - English is default.
9. The Set user information for DB2 Administration Server window open, as
   shown in next figure. Here you have to specify the user ID tiodb as it will be
   the instance owner of the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator
   database. The user ID tiodb will be created with the proper authority by the
   DB2 installation process. Make sure you record the password as you will be
   prompted for this password during the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic
   Orchestrator installation.




                                Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems   35
Figure 3-4 Set the DB2 administrator user to tiodb

               10.The Set up administration contact list window opens. Select Local - Create a
                  contact list on this system.
               11.Click Next at the Configure DB2 instances window.
               12.At the Prepare the DB2 tools catalog choose Prepare the DB2 tools catalog
                  in a local database.
               13.Accept the default values at the Specify a local database to store the DB2
                  tools catalog window.
               14.At the Specify a contact for health monitor notification choose Defer the task
                  until after installation is complete.
               15.At the Request satellite information screen choose Defer this task until after
                  installation is complete.
               16.At the Start copying files window you have the chance to review the
                  installation options. Click on Install to initiate the installation.
               17.Then the installation completes, open a DB2 command window: Start -> IBM
                  DB2 -> Command Line Tools -> Command Window.
               18.Issue the db2licm command to add the license provided by IBM Tivoli
                  Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator:



36   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
C:IBMSQLLIBBIN>d:                       <-- This is the CDROM drive
      D:>cd db2license
      D:>db2licm -a ./db2wsue.lic
      DBI1402I License added successfully.
      DBI1426I This product is now licensed for use as specified in the
      License Acceptance and License Information documents pertaining to the
      licensed copy of this product. USE OF THE PRODUCT CONSTITUTES
      ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS OF THE IBM LICENSE ACCEPTANCE AND LICENSE
      INFORMATION DOCUMENTS, LOCATED IN THE FOLLOWING DIRECTORY:
      "C:IBMSQLLIBlicenseen"
19.Reboot the system

Create database and database schema
After installing IBM DB2 perform the following steps to create the database and
the database schema used by IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator.

 Important: You must logon to your system using the tiodb user ID to be
 successful with the DB2 configuration.

1. Logon to the system as the tiodb user ID.
2. Open a DB2 command window.
3. Create the database for IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator by
   entering the following command:
      db2 create database <db_name>
   Where, <db_name> is the name of the database you want to create.
   Make sure the database name follow the DB2 naming conventions and that
   you record it as you will require it when installing IBM Tivoli Intelligent
   ThinkDynamic Orchestrator.
   You can confirm the creation of the database by issuing the following
   command:
      db2 list database directory
      C:IBMSQLLIBBIN>db2 create database ITITODB
      DB20000I The CREATE DATABASE command completed successfully.
      C:IBMSQLLIBBIN>db2 list database directory
      System Database Directory
      Number of entries in the directory = 2
      Database 1 entry:
         Database alias                       = ITITODB
         Database name                        = ITITODB
         Database drive                       = C:DB2
         Database release level               = a.00
         Comment                              =



                               Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems   37
Directory entry type                 = Indirect
                         Catalog database partition number    = 0
                      Database 2 entry:
                         Database alias                       =   TOOLSDB
                         Database name                        =   TOOLSDB
                         Database drive                       =   C:DB2
                         Database release level               =   a.00
                         Comment                              =
                         Directory entry type                 =   Indirect
                         Catalog database partition number    =   0
                         C:IBMSQLLIBBIN>
               4. Copy the tablespace.sql script located in the /samples directory on the IBM
                  Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator CD to your IBM DB2 installation
                  directory (in our case C:IBMSQLLIBBIN).
               5. Create the tablespace for the database by performing the following steps:
                      db2 connect to <db_name> user tiodb using <tiodb_pwd>
                  Where, <db_name> is the name of the database you created in the previous
                  step, and <tiodb_pwd> is the password for user ID tiodb.
                  Then run the following command:
                      db2 -tvf tablespace.sql
                      C:IBMSQLLIBBIN>db2 connect to ITITODB user tiodb
                      Enter current password for tiodb:
                      Database Connection Information
                      Database server        = DB2/NT 8.1.2
                      SQL authorization ID = TIODB
                      Local database alias = ITITODB
                      C:IBMSQLLIBBIN>db2 -tvf tablespace.sql
                      CREATE BUFFERPOOL IBM16K SIZE 250 PAGESIZE 16K NOT EXTENDED STORAGE
                      DB20000I The SQL command completed successfully.
                      CREATE BUFFERPOOL IBM8K SIZE 250 PAGESIZE 8K NOT EXTENDED STORAGE
                      DB20000I The SQL command completed successfully.
                      CREATE REGULAR TABLESPACE IBM8KSPACE PAGESIZE 8K MANAGED BY SYSTEM USING
                      ('IBM8KSPACE') BUFFERPOOL IBM8K DROPPED TABLE RECOVERY OFF
                      DB20000I The SQL command completed successfully.
                      CREATE REGULAR TABLESPACE IBM16KSPACE PAGESIZE 16K MANAGED BY SYSTEM
                      USING ('IBM16KSPACE') BUFFERPOOL IBM16K DROPPED TABLE RECOVERY OFF
                      DB20000I The SQL command completed successfully.
                      CREATE TEMPORARY TABLESPACE IBM8KTEMPSPACE PAGESIZE 8K MANAGED BY SYSTEM
                      USING ('IBM8KTEMPSPACE') BUFFERPOOL IBM8K DROPPED TABLE RECOVERY OFF
                      DB20000I The SQL command completed successfully.
                      CREATE TEMPORARY TABLESPACE IBM16KTEMPSPACE PAGESIZE 16K MANAGED BY
                      SYSTEM USING ('IBM16KTEMPSPACE') BUFFERPOOL IBM16K DROPPED TABLE
                      RECOVERY OFF
                      DB20000I The SQL command completed successfully.
                      C:IBMSQLLIBBIN>



38   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
3.2.5 Installing and configuring IBM Directory Server V5.1
           In this section we show the installation and configuration steps of IBM Directory
           Server, V5.1. In a IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator environment
           the IBM Directory Server can be installed on any system using any supported
           operating system. In our case study scenario, we decided to install IBM Directory
           Server on the same machine as the IBM DB2 server. In any case, an LDAP client
           must be installed on the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator
           machine to allow it to communicate with the IBM Directory server.

           To install and configure IBM Directory Server 5.1, perform the following steps:
           1. Log on to the system as tioadmin.
           2. Ensure that the user ID tioldap has been created using the guidelines
              presented in 3.1.2 User IDs and passwords on page 30.

            Important: This implementation of LDAP can be in a shared environment but
            it will still need to have a dedicated LDAP ID (tioldap) created to service the
            IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator application.

           3. Insert the IBM Directory Server, 5.1 CD in the drive and start the setup.exe
              located in the ids_ismp folder to start the installation.
           4. Select Language of choice for the installation process. English is set to
              default.
           5. The installation wizard starts the installation process click Next.
           6. Accept the License Agreement by selecting I accept the terms in the
              license agreement option.
           7. Because this installation process occurs in the IBM DB2 server machine, the
              install should detect that IBM DB2 is already installed.
           8. Select the installation path. Ensure there are no spaces in the installation
              path. We used C:IBMLDAP.
           9. Choose a language of choice for the IBM Directory Server. English is set to
              default.
           10.The Select the installation type window opens. Select the Custom Install
              option.
           11.The Select features window opens, as shown in next figure. Select the
              following packages:
              –   Client SDK
              –   Web Administration
              –   Server
              –   IBM WebSphere Application Server - Express


                                            Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems   39
– GSKit

                Attention: If you are installing IBM Directory Server on a dedicated server,
                which is not the IBM DB2 server, ensure the DB2 option is selected. IBM
                Directory Server requires that a local database be installed.




               Figure 3-5 Select IBM Directory Server components

               12.At the Start copying files window you have the chance to review the
                  installation options. Click on Next to initiate the installation.
               13.The installation wizard installs all the selected applications and presents the
                  IBM Directory Server V5.1 Readme files.
               14.We recommend that you choose to restart your system at a later time
                  because there is still one step left to complete the install process. Choose No,
                  I will restart my system at a later time. Click Next and then Finish.
               15.Copy the thinkdynamics.schema file located in the /samples directory on the
                  IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator CD to your IBM Directory
                  installation directory (in our case C:IBMLDAP).
               16.Reboot the system.




40   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
After installing IBM Directory perform the following steps to create the database
and configure the IBM Directory server used by IBM Tivoli Intelligent
ThinkDynamic Orchestrator:

 Important: You must logon to your system using the tioadmin user ID in order
 to be successful with the IBM Directory configuration.

17.At the system restart, logon as tioadmin.
18.Ensure the thinkdynamics.schema file located in the /samples directory on
   the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator CD has been copied to
   the IBM Directory installation directory.
19.The IBM Directory Server Configuration Tool window opens.
   The Configuration Tool can also be opened by Click START > Programs >
   IBM Directory Server 5.1 > Directory Configuration.
20.Select Administrator DN/password and set the LDAP Administrator to
   cn=root and enter a password. Make sure you record the password, as you
   will need during the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator
   installation.




                                Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems   41
Figure 3-6 Configure the LDAP Administrator to IBM Directory Server

               21.Select Configure database and follow the prompts to create a new database.
                  a. When prompted for a user ID to configure the database provide tioldap.
                     The user tioldap will be the instance owner for the LDAP database used by
                     IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator.
                  b. When prompted for the database name, enter the database name of
                     choice. Make sure the database name follows the IBM DB2 naming
                     conventions. Record the database name as it will be required during the
                     IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator installation process. In
                     our case study scenario use used LDAPDB.
                  c. Follow the wizard final steps to create the database and accept the default
                     values. At the end, you will have the chance to review the database
                     settings before creating the database.
               22.Select Manage suffixes and set the Suffix DN to dc=ibm,dc=com.




42   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
Figure 3-7 Managing IBM Directory Server suffixes

23.Select Manage Schema files and create the schema for the LDAP database.
   Browse to the thinkdynamics.schema file you copied to your IBM Directory
   installation director and click Add, to add the file to the Current schema files
   list. Click OK.
24.Select Import ldif data and populate the database with the information
   provided in the ldap.dif file. Browse to the /samples directory on the IBM Tivoli
   Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator CD and select the ldap.ldif file. Make
   sure the Standard import radio button is selected and click Import.
   Expect to see an output similar to the following on the Task messages
   section:
   Plugin of type DATABASE is successfully loaded from
   C:IBMLDAPlibback-config.dll.
   ldif2db: 37 entries have been successfully added out of 37 attempted.
   Close the IBM Directory Server Configuration Tool.



                                 Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems   43
25.Open a command line and start the embedded WebSphere server by running
                  the following command:
                      C:IBMldapAppsrvbinstartserver server1
                  If you have changed the default installation directory, substitute the
                  appropriate path in the command above.
               26.Open the IBM Directory Server Web console by opening a Web browser and
                  going to the following URL:
                      http://localhost:9080/IDSWebApp/IDSjsp/Login.jsp
               27.Select LDAP Host name to Console Admin, log in using the user ID
                  superadmin and password secret, then click Login.
               28.Expand Console Administration, click on Manage Console Servers, and click
                  Add to add your IBM Directory server to the list.
               29.Enter the host name of the IBM Directory server machine and click OK.




               Figure 3-8 Logging in to the IBM Directory Server Web Administration Tool




44   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
30.Start the IBM Directory server service by opening DOS command line and
            running the following command:
                C:IBMldapbinibmslapd
            If you changed the default installation directory, substitute the appropriate
            path in the command above.
         31.Log out of the Web console and log in using the IBM Directory server just
            defined using the user ID cn=root and the password you set during the IBM
            Directory server configuration.
         32.Expand Directory management and select Manage entries. Select
            dc=ibm,dc=com and click Expand.
            Verify that all the entries from the ldap.dif file are listed.



3.3 Installing and configuring TIOsrv - Windows
         In this section we describe the steps to setup the machine hosting the IBM Tivoli
         Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator Server on Microsoft Windows 2000
         Server. The high-level install steps are presented in the following figure.


                                             Create tioadmin User ID



                                          Download and install Cygwin



                                                  Configure SSH



                                         Install and configure DB2 Client


                                    Install and configure IBM Directory Client



                                   Install and configure IBM WerbSphere Server



                                Apply IBM WebSphere FixPak 1 and required fixes



                                   Install and configure IBM WerbSphere Client


                       Install and configure IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator

         Figure 3-9 TIOsrv installation steps



                                             Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems    45
The following sections explain each step of the above flow in detail.


3.3.1 Creating the required user IDs
               Create a local user account tioadmin as follows:
               1. Under Computer Management choose System Tools -> Local users and
                  groups -> Users and add the user tioadmin.
               2. Select the newly created user and make it members of the Administrators
                  group.
               3. Select the user ID tioadmin and set its Local Path to:
                  C:Cygwinhomethinkcontrol


3.3.2 Installing and configuring Cygwin
               Instructions for obtaining, installing and configuring Cygwin are provided in 3.2.2,
               “Installing and configuring Cygwin” on page 31. Please follow those instructions
               for setting up Cygwin on the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator
               server machine.


3.3.3 Configuring SSH communications
               The SSH configuration follows similar guidelines as described in 3.2.3,
               “Configuring SSH communications” on page 32, except the fact that there is no
               need to generate a new RSA public key. Here we provide the entire SSH
               configuration process required to allow the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic
               Orchestrator to communicate with the IBM DB2 server via SSH.

               When the Cygwin installation completes click on the Cygwin icon to open a bash
               shell window and perform the following steps to configure SSH:

                Important: Verify that all servers in your configuration are setup correctly in
                either DNS and or /etc/hosts

               1. Move to the /usr/bin directory and issue the host configuration program
                  ssh-host-config as shown in the following example. When prompted for
                  environment variables, press Enter to accept the defaults.




46   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
$ cd /usr/bin
      $ ./ssh-host-config -y
      Generating /etc/ssh_host_key
      Generating /etc/ssh_host_rsa_key
      Generating /etc/ssh_host_dsa_key
      Generating /etc/ssh_config file
      Privilege separation is set to yes by default since OpenSSH 3.3.
      However, this requires a non-privileged account called 'sshd'.
      For more info on privilege separation read
      /usr/doc/openssh/README.privsep.
      Warning: The following function requires administrator privileges!
      Generating /etc/sshd_config file
      Added ssh to /cygdrive/c/WINNT/system32/drivers/etc/services
      Added ssh to /etc/inetd.conf
      Do you want to install sshd as service?
      Which value should the environment variable CYGWIN have when
      sshd starts? It's recommended to set at least "ntsec" to be
      able to change user context without password.
      Default is "binmode ntsec tty". CYGWIN=
      The service has been installed under LocalSystem account.
      Host configuration finished. Have fun!
2. Export the CYGWIN variable.
      $ export CYGWIN=ntsec

    Tip: This command will set an environment variable for products to
    reference as a global variable.

3. Move to the /var directory and change the attributes of the directory named
   empty.
      $ cd /var
      $ chmod 700 empty
4. Start the SSH service as follows:
      $ cygrunsrv -S sshd
5. Move to the home directory of the tioadmin user ID and create the .ssh
   directory.
      $ cd
      $ pwd
      /home/thinkcontrol
      $ mkdir .ssh
6. Copy the key files from the IBM DB2 server machine (TIOdbsrv) to
   c:cygwinhomethinkcontrol.ssh directory on the IBM Tivoli Intelligent
   ThinkDynamic Orchestrator server machine (TIOsrv). The keys are located in
   the c:cygwinhomethinkcontrol.ssh directory and are the following:



                                Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems   47
id_rsa
                  id_rsa.pub
                  authorized_keys

                Note: You will need to configure SSH communications and copy the key files
                on all other servers in your environment that are running Cygwin and need to
                communicate with the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator
                server.

               7. To configure SSH to accept connections from new hosts without prompting for
                  confirmation, create a file in the /home/thinkcontrol/.ssh directory called
                  config. Edit the config file and add the line StrictHostKeyChecking no as
                  follows:
                      # cd /home/thinkcontrol/.ssh
                      # touch config
                      # vi config
                  Add in the following line:
                      StrictHostKeyChecking no
                  List the config file. The output should read as follows:
                      StrictHostKeyChecking no
               8. To verify that SSH is configured properly, try to access the ITITO database
                  server machine using the ssh command as shown in the following example.
                      $ ssh tioadmin@tio12
                      Warning: Permanently added 'tio12,9.3.187.163' (RSA) to the list of
                      known hosts.
                      Fanfare!!!
                      You are successfully logged in to this server!!!
                      $ exit
                      logout
                      Connection to tio12 closed.


3.3.4 Installing IBM DB2 Universal Database V8.1.2 Client
               This section provides instructions to install the IBM DB2 Universal Database
               V8.12 Client.

                Note: Ensure you perform the IBM DB2 installation logged on as tioadmin.

               Use the DB2 installation media provided with the IBM Tivoli Intelligent
               ThinkDynamic Orchestrator product. This ensures that you get the correct
               version and level of DB2 installed.



48   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
1. Logged on as tioadmin, move to the directory where IBM DB2 and run the
   setup.exe command to start the installation. From the installation window,
   select Install Products.
2. Select the product we want to install: DB2 Administration Client.
3. The Welcome to the DB2 Setup wizard windows opens. Click Next.
4. Accept the License Agreement by selecting I accept the terms in the
   license agreement option.
5. The Select the installation type window opens. Select the Custom Install
   option.
6. Select Install DB2 Administration Client on this computer.
7. The Select features window opens, as shown below. Select the following
   package:
   – Client support
   Also select the installation path. Ensure there are no spaces in the installation
   path. We used C:IBMSQLLIB.




Figure 3-10 DB2 Client install options

8. Choose Language of choice - English is default.



                                   Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems   49
9. At the Configure NetBios screen, click Next.
               10.At the Start copying files window you have the chance to review the
                  installation options. Click on Install to initiate the installation.
               11.When the installation completes, open a DB2 command window: Start -> IBM
                  DB2 -> Command Line Tools -> Command Window.
               12.Run the following commands from the DB2 command line processor to
                  catalog and connect to the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator
                  database on the IBM DB2 server:
                      db2 catalog tcpip node <db_node> remote <dbserver_hostname> server 50000
                      db2 catalog db <db_name> as <db_name> at node <db_node>
                  Where, the variables are defined as follows:
                  db_node           A local, user-defined alias for the node to be
                                    cataloged. This is an arbitrary name used to identify
                                    the node. It should be a meaningful name to make it
                                    easier to remember.
                  dbserver_hostname The hostname of the IBM DB2 server.
                  db_name           Specifies the name of the database to catalog. This is
                                    the name of the database created for the IBM Tivoli
                                    Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator server.
               13.You can test the catalog by issuing the following commands:
                      db2 connect to <db_name> user tiodb
                      C:IBMSQLLIBBIN>db2 catalog tcpip node tio11 remote tio12 server 50000
                      DB20000I The CATALOG TCPIP NODE command completed successfully.
                      DB21056W Directory changes may not be effective until the directory
                      cache is refreshed.
                      C:IBMSQLLIBBIN>db2 catalog db ITITODB as ITITODB at node tio11
                      DB20000I The CATALOG DATABASE command completed successfully.
                      DB21056W Directory changes may not be effective until the directory
                      cache is refreshed.
                      C:IBMSQLLIBBIN>db2 connect to ITITODB user tiodb
                      Enter current password for tiodb:
                         Database Connection Information
                       Database server        = DB2/NT 8.1.2
                       SQL authorization ID   = TIODB
                       Local database alias   = ITITODB
                      C:IBMSQLLIBBIN>


3.3.5 Installing and configuring IBM Directory V5.1 Client
               In this section we show the installation and configuration steps of IBM Directory
               V5.1 Client on Windows. In our case study scenario the IBM Directory Server is
               installed on the same machine as the DB2 server. In any configuration of choice,



50   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
an LDAP client must be installed on the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic
Orchestrator machine to allow it to communicate with the IBM Directory server.

To install and configure IBM Directory Client V5.1, perform the following steps:
1. Log on to the system as tioadmin.
2. Ensure that the IBM Directory Server is up and running before continuing.
3. Insert the IBM Directory Server, 5.1 CD in the drive and start the setup.exe
   located in the ids_ismp folder to start the installation.
4. Select Language of choice for the installation process. English is set to
   default.
5. The installation wizard starts the installation process click Next.
6. Accept the License Agreement by selecting I accept the terms in the
   license agreement option.
7. Select the installation path. Ensure there are no spaces in the installation
   path. We used C:IBMLDAP.
8. Choose a language of choice for the IBM Directory Client. English is set to
   default.
9. The Select the installation type window opens. Select the Custom Install
   option.
10.The Select features window opens, as shown below. Select the following
   packages:
   – Client SDK




                                 Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems   51
Figure 3-11 LDAP Client install options

               11.At the Start copying files window you have the chance to review the
                  installation options. Click on Next to initiate the installation.
               12.The installation wizard installs the selected application (Client SDK) and
                  presents the IBM Directory V5.1 Client Readme file.
               13.It is recommended to choose to restart your system at this time. Click Next
                  and then Finish.
               14.Reboot the system.


3.3.6 Installing IBM WebSphere Application Server Base V5.0
               In this section we describe the IBM WebSphere Application Server Base Edition
               V5.0. Later it will be required to install the IBM WebSphere Fixpack 1 to comply
               with the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator required version of IBM
               WebSphere: V5.0.1.

                Note: Ensure you perform the IBM WebSphere Application Server installation
                logged on as tioadmin.




52   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
Use the IBM WebSphere Application Server installation media provided with the
IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator product. This ensures that you
get the correct version and level of IBM WebSphere Application Server installed.

To install IBM WebSphere Application Server Base Edition V5.0, perform the
following steps:
1. Log on to the system as tioadmin.
2. Move to the nt directory of the drive the IBM WebSphere Application Server
   CD is mounted and issue the following command to start the installation
   process:
      install.exe
3. Choose a language to be used during the install process.
4. The Welcome to the IBM WebSphere install wizard window opens. Click Next
5. Accept the License Agreement by selecting I accept the terms in the
   license agreement option.
6. The installation wizard checks the prerequisites. The Select the installation
   type window opens. Select Custom Install.
7. The Select features window opens, as shown in the next figure. From the
   default selection list, deselect the Application Server Samples option.




Figure 3-12 WebSphere install options



                                 Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems   53
8. The Installation path window opens. Select the installation path for the various
                  components to be installed.
                  Here are the installation paths used in our scenario. Make sure there are no
                  spaces in the installation path.

                WebSphere installation directories

                Product                                            Installation Directory

                IBM WebSphere Application Server Base Edition      c:IBMWebSphereAppServer
                V5.0.1

                IBM Embedded Messaging Server and Client           c:IBMWebSphereMQ

                IBM HTTP Server                                    c:IBMHTTPServer

               9. The install wizard prompts for the node name and hostname of the computer.
                  Supply the fully qualified DNS name on the Hostname field. In our scenario
                  we used the following:
                  Node Name: tio11
                  Host Name: tio11.itsc.austin.ibm.com
               10.Select both IBM WebSphere and IBM HTTP Server to run as a Windows
                  service. Also, specify the tioadmin user ID and password so that those
                  services run under tioadmin authority.




               Figure 3-13 WebSphere runs as Windows service


54   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
Attention: If a dialog appears with message ID INST0056E, click OK and
            continue. No further action is required.

           11.At the Start copying files window you have the chance to review the
              installation options. Click Next to initiate the installation.
           12.Choose to wether or not to register the product at this time.
           13.When the installation completes, the IBM WebSphere First Steps window
              opens. Select Exit and then Finish to end the install process.


3.3.7 Install the IBM WebSphere fixpack 1 and required fixes
           In this section we provide the installation steps for upgrading IBM WebSphere
           Application Server Base Edition with the required fixpack1 and fixes. The
           following steps need to be performed:
           1.   Install IBM WebSphere fixpack 1.
           2.   Apply the MQ CSD03 fix.
           3.   Apply the IY43610 fix.
           4.   Apply the IY44803 fix.
           5.   Apply the PQ75055 fix.

           Install IBM WebSphere fixpack 1
           After installing IBM WebSphere Application Server Base Edition V5.0 you must
           install the fixpack 1, which is shipped with IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic
           Orchestrator.

            Note: When installing the fixpack 1, ensure that the IBM WebSphere
            Application Server, IBM HTTP and IBM HTTP Administration services are
            stopped. The installation will fail if these services are running.

           Here we provide the steps for installing the IBM WebSphere fixpack 1.
           1. Still logged on as tioadmin, ensure that the IBM WebSphere Application
              Server, IBM HTTP and IBM HTTP Administration services are stopped.
           2. Start the fixpack install process by opening a DOS prompt window and
              moving to the <IBM WebSphere installation directory>bin directory and
              initializing the WebSphere command line environment by running the
              following script:
                   cd IBMWebSphereAppServerbin
                   setupCmdLine.bat




                                            Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems   55
3. Move to the drive where the IBM WebSphere fixpack 1 cd is mounted. Run
                  the following script:
                      updateWizard.bat

                    Tip: Do not run the updateWizard.bat file through the GUI.

               4. The Welcome to the Update installation wizard for IBM WebSphere window
                  opens. Click Next.
               5. The update wizard checks the current level of IBM WebSphere installed. Click
                  Next.
               6. The Select the installation type window opens. Select Install fix packs.
               7. The update wizard prompts for the location of the fixpack 1.
               8. Select the fixpack to be installed (was50_fp1_win).




               Figure 3-14 IBM WebSphere Fix Pack 1 installation

               9. Select to upgrade the following components:
                  – IBM HTTP Server
                  – Embedded Messaging
               10.At the Start copying files window you have the chance to review the update
                  options. Click Next to initiate the update.


56   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
When the update wizard completes, the following dialog is displayed.




Figure 3-15 IBM WebSphere Fix Pack 1 installation completed


Apply the MQ CSD03 fix
The MQ CSD03 fix is located in the /patches/csd03 directory in the IBM Tivoli
Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator CD.

 Note: When installing the MQ CSD03 fix, ensure that the IBM WebSphere
 Application Server is stopped. The installation will fail if this service is running.

Here we provide the steps for installing the MQ CSD 03 fix.
1. Still logged on as tioadmin, ensure that the IBM WebSphere Application
   Server is stopped.
2. Start the fixpack install process by opening a DOS prompt window and
   moving to the patchesCsd03 directory of the IBM Tivoli Intelligent
   ThinkDynamic Orchestrator CD and running the following program
       WINDOWS_CSD03_U200187A.exe
3. Follow the wizard instructions to extract the file for the fix.
4. When the file extraction finishes, click Install to begin the CSD 03 fix
   installation.


                                   Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems   57
Figure 3-16 WebSphere MQ CSD 03 install

               5. At the end of the installation, verify the version of the WebSphere MQ by
                  running the mqver command:
                      C:IBMWebSphereAppServerbin>mqver
                      Name:        WebSphere MQ
                      Version:     530.3 CSD03
                      CMVC level: p530-CSD03J
                      BuildType:   IKAP - (Production)

               Apply the IY43610 fix
               The IY43610 fix is located in the /patches/I_43610 directory in the IBM Tivoli
               Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator CD.

                Note: When installing the IY43610 fix, ensure that the IBM WebSphere
                Application Server and the WebSphere Embedded Messaging services are
                stopped. The installation will fail if this service is running.

               Here we provide the steps for installing the IY43610 fix.
               1. Still logged on as tioadmin, ensure that the IBM WebSphere Application
                  Server and the WebSphere Embedded Messaging services are stopped.
               2. Move to the <WebSphere MQ install directory>bin directory. In our case the
                  installation directory is c:IBMWebSphereMQ. Take a backup copy of the
                  existing files:
                  –   imqb23vn.dll
                  –   imqc23vn.dll
                  –   imqs23vn.dll
                  –   imqb23in.dll



58   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
– imqc23in.dll
   – imqs23in.dll
3. Start the fixpack install process by opening a DOS prompt window and
   moving to the patchesI_43610 directory of the IBM Tivoli Intelligent
   ThinkDynamic Orchestrator CD.
4. Copy the IY43610.windows.zip file to a working directory (c:temp for
   example) and unzip the file:
      unzip IY43610.windows.zip
5. Copy the files to the <MQ install directory>bin directory replacing the existing
   files with these new versions.

Apply the IY44803 fix
The IY44803 fix is located in the /patches/I_44803 directory in the IBM Tivoli
Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator CD.

 Note: When installing the IY44803 fix, ensure that the IBM WebSphere
 Application Server and the WebSphere Embedded Messaging services are
 stopped. The installation will fail if this service is running.

Here we provide the steps for installing the IY44803 fix.
1. Still logged on as tioadmin, ensure that the IBM WebSphere Application
   Server and the WebSphere Embedded Messaging services are stopped.
2. Move to the <WebSphere MQ install directory> directory. In our case the
   installation directory is c:IBMWebSphereMQ.
3. Take a backup copy of following directories under the WebSphere MQ
   installation directory:
      javabin
      javalib
4. Create the following directories:
      tools
      toolsjava
      doc
5. Start the fixpack install process by opening a DOS prompt window and
   moving to the patchesI_44803 directory of the IBM Tivoli Intelligent
   ThinkDynamic Orchestrator CD.
6. Copy the IY44803.windows.zip file to a working directory (c:temp for
   example) and unzip the file:
      unzip IY44803.windows.zip




                                  Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems   59
7. Copy the files to the appropriate directory replacing the existing files with
                  these new versions as follows:
                  –   Copy all the files under bin to C:IBMWebSphereMQjavabin
                  –   Copy all the files under lib to C:IBMWebSphereMQjavalib
                  –   Copy the one file under doc to C:IBMWebSphereMQdoc
                  –   Copy the content under samples to C:IBMWebSphere MQtoolsjava

               Apply the PQ75055 fix
               The PQ75055 fix is located in the /patches/WAS_PQ75055 directory in the IBM
               Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator CD.

                Note: When installing the PQ75055 fix, ensure that the IBM WebSphere
                Application Server and the WebSphere Embedded Messaging services are
                stopped. The installation will fail if this service is running.

               Here we provide the steps for installing the PQ75055 fix.
               1. Still logged on as tioadmin, ensure that the IBM WebSphere Application
                  Server and the WebSphere Embedded Messaging services are stopped.
               2. Start the fix install process by opening a DOS prompt window and moving to
                  the <IBM WebSphere installation directory>bin directory and initializing the
                  WebSphere command line environment by running the following script:
                      cd IBMWebSphereAppServerbin
                      setupCmdLine.bat
               3. Move to the <WebSphere install directory> directory and create a directory
                  named update. In our case the installation directory is c:IBMWebSphere.
                      cd IBMWebSphereAppServer
                      mkdir update
               4. Copy the apar_PQ75055.zip file from the patchesWAS_PQ75055 directory
                  on the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator CD to the update
                  directory.
               5. Copy the WindowsUpdateInstaller.zip file from the
                  patchesWAS_PQ75055UpdateInstallerwin directory on the IBM Tivoli
                  Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator CD to the update directory.
               6. Unzip the WindowsUpdateInstaller.zip file.
                      unzip WindowsUpdateInstaller.zip
               7. Unzip the apar_PQ75055.zip file.
                      unzip apar_PQ75055.zip
               8. Start the update wizard by running updateWizard.bat from command line:



60   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
updateWizard.bat

    Tip: Do not run the updateWizard.bat file through the GUI. The Wizard
    may open up in the background.

9. Choose a Language of choice for install screens.
10.The Welcome to the Update installation wizard for IBM WebSphere window
   opens. Click Next.
11.The update wizard checks the current level of IBM WebSphere installed. Click
   Next.
12.The Select the installation type window opens. Select Install fixes.
13.The update wizard prompts for the location of the PQ75055 fix.

    Attention: On the fix directory panel, ensure the directory path is:
    <WebSphere install directory>updateefixes.. (type in both dots)




Figure 3-17 PQ75055 installation directory

14.Select the fix to be installed (PQ75055).




                                  Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems   61
Figure 3-18 IBM WebSphere PQ75055 installation

               15.In the Start copying files window you have the chance to review the update
                  options. Click Next to initiate the update. The next dialog you will see is the
                  update wizard completion window shown below:




62   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
Figure 3-19 IBM WebSphere PQ75055 fix installation completion


Install and configure WebSphere Application Client V5.0.1
In this section we describe the IBM WebSphere Application Client V5.0.1

 Note: Ensure you perform the IBM WebSphere Application Server installation
 logged on as tioadmin.

Use the IBM WebSphere Application Client installation media provided with the
IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator product. This ensures that you
get the correct version and level of IBM WebSphere Application Client installed.

To install IBM WebSphere Application Client V5.0, perform the following steps:
1. Log on to the system as tioadmin.
2. Move to the nt directory of the drive the IBM WebSphere Application Client
   CD is mounted and issue the following command to start the installation
   process:
      install.exe
3. Choose a language to be used during the install process.
4. The Welcome to the IBM WebSphere install wizard window opens. Click Next



                                Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems   63
5. Accept the License Agreement by selecting I accept the terms in the
                  license agreement option.
               6. The installation wizard checks the prerequisites. The Select the installation
                  type window opens. Select Custom Install.
               7. The Select features window opens, as shown in the next figure. From the
                  default selection list, deselect the Samples option.




               Figure 3-20 WebSphere Client install options

               8. The Installation path window opens. Select the installation path for the various
                  components to be installed. We used c:IBMWebSphereAppClient
                  Make sure there are no spaces in the installation path.

                    Attention: The IBM WebSphere Application Client must be installed in the
                    WebSphere home directory. If you selected a custom installation directory
                    for WebSphere Application Server, then you must install the Application
                    Client in the same directory as WebSphere Application Server. For
                    example, if you installed WebSphere Application Server in
                    C:IBMWebSphereAppServer, then the WebSphere Application Client
                    should be installed in C:IBMWebSphereAppclient.

               9. The install wizard prompts for the hostname and port number of the
                  WebSphere Server computer. Supply the fully qualified DNS name on the


64   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
Hostname field and accept the default. In our scenario we used the fully
   qualified hostname of our IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator
   server machine:
      tio11.itsc.austin.ibm.com
10.At the Start copying files window you have the chance to review the
   installation options. Click Next to initiate the installation.
11.Choose to whether or not to register the product at this time.
12.When the installation completes, select Finish to end the install process.
13.Reboot your system at this point.
14.Log on to the system as tioadmin.

    Note: Ensure you perform the following steps logged on as tioadmin.

15.Move to the <WebSphere Client Install Directory>javajrelibsecurity
   directory.
16.Edit the java.security file and add the following at the very end of the file
   login.configuration.provider=com.ibm.security.auth.login.ConfigFile
   login.config.url.1=file:/<WAS_Client_instdir>/properties/wsjaas_client.conf
   Where, <WAS_Client_instdir> is the WebSphere Application Client
   installation directory.
   # Class to instantiate as the javax.security.auth.login.Configuration
   provider
   login.configuration.provider=com.ibm.security.auth.login.ConfigFile
   # Default login configuration file
   login.config.url.1=file:/C:/IBM/WebSPhere/AppClient/properties/wsjaas_clien
   t.conf

    Important: You must use forward slashes in the directory path for the line,
    including the WebSphere Application Client installation directory.

17.Move to the <WebSphere Client Install Directory>properties directory.
18.Edit the sas.client.props and locate the line:
      com.ibm.CORBA.loginSource=prompt
   And change it to:
      com.ibm.CORBA.loginSource=none


Change the default transaction log size
Perform the following steps to change the default transaction log size:



                                  Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems   65
1. Start the IBM WebSphere Server service using the Windows Services tool.
               2. Start the IBM WebSphere Application Server Administrative Console by
                  selecting Programs -> IBM WebSphere -> Application Server ->
                  Administrative Console
               3. Provide an User ID to be used for logging purposes only.
               4. In the navigation pane, select Server -> Application Servers.
               5. Select server1 under the server list. This displays the properties of the
                  application server, server1, in the content pane.
               6. Select the Transaction Service link, to display the properties page for the
                  transaction service.
               7. Under the Configuration Tab, change the value of the Transaction log
                  directory attribute to the following value:
                      <WebSphere_install_directory>/tranlog/server1;10M
                  Where, <WebSphere_install_directory> is the IBM WebSphere Application
                  Server installation directory. For example, in our scenario we used:
                      C:IBMWebSphereAppServer/tranlog/server1;10M

                    Important: You have to use back slashes on the IBM WebSphere
                    Application Server installation directory and forward slashes on the rest of
                    the path.




66   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
Figure 3-21 Changing the transaction log size

                 8. Click OK to make the changes effective.
                 9. Save the changes before exiting the BM WebSphere Application Server
                    Administrative Console.
                 10.Stop and Start the IBM WebSphere Server service using the Windows
                    Services tool.


3.3.8 Installing IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator
                 This section provides instructions on installing IBM Tivoli Intelligent
                 ThinkDynamic Orchestrator on the TIOsrv machine running Windows 2000
                 Server.



                                                Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems   67
Important: Before proceeding with the installation steps, ensure that the
                following activities are completed.

                  The machine hosting the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator
                  database and Directory Server have been setup and all prerequisite software
                  is configured and operational. This has been covered in 3.2, “Installing and
                  configuring TIOdbsrv - Windows” on page 30.
                  All the prerequisite software for IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic
                  Orchestrator are installed, configured and up and running. This has been
                  covered in this section.
                  Ensure that SSH communication between the TIOsrv machine and TIOdbsrv
                  machine is operational.

                Note: Ensure you perform the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic
                Orchestrator installation logged on as tioadmin.

               To install and configure IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator perform
               the following steps:
               1. Log on to the system as tioadmin.
               2. Set the system PATH variable to include the IBM Tivoli Intelligent
                  ThinkDynamic Orchestrator binary files as follows:
                  Click Start-> Settings-> Control Panel-> System-> Advanced Tab. Click
                  the Environment Variables button and add the following line to the System
                  PATH variable:
                      C:cygwinhomethinkcontrolbin
                  If you installed Cygwin in a custom directory, substitute that path.
               3. Mount the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator CD into the CD
                  drive. Move to the to the /install directory and run the setupwin32.exe
                  command.
               4. The Welcome to the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator install
                  wizard window opens. Click Next.




68   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
Figure 3-22 IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator welcome window

5. Accept the License Agreement by selecting I accept the terms in the
   license agreement option.
6. Because IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator leverages the
   Cygwin application, the installation wizard prompt for the Cygwin installation
   directory.
7. The IBM Directory Server Information window opens. Provide the following
   information about LDAP (defined during the IBM Directory Server
   configuration):
   – LDAP Administrator user ID and password. This is the root user ID.
   – Fully qualified hostname of the IBM Directory Server machine
   – TCPIP port number used to communicate with the IBM Directory Server.




                                 Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems   69
Figure 3-23 IBM Directory Server information

               8. On the IBM WebSphere Configuration panel, specify the DNS suffix name of
                  the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator server and the directory
                  where IBM WebSphere Application Server is installed.




70   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
Figure 3-24 IBM WebSphere Application Server information

   After you click Next, the installation wizard will verify that it can communicate
   with the IBM WebSphere Application Server and that the IBM WebSphere
   Application Server is properly configured for IBM Tivoli Intelligent
   ThinkDynamic Orchestrator. This may take a few minutes.
9. The IBM DB2 Server Information window opens. Provide the following
   information about IBM DB2 (defined during the IBM DB2 Server
   configuration).
   a. Remote Alias for the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator
      database. In our scenario we defined the alias as the same name as the
      database name created in the TIOdbsrv machine: ITITODB.
   b. The user ID and password of the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic
      Orchestrator database owner. This is the tiodb user ID.
   c. The fully qualified hostname of the IBM DB2 Database Server.
   d. TCPIP port number used to communicate with the IBM DB2 Database
      Server.
   e. The IBM DB2 Client installation directory on the IBM Tivoli Intelligent
      ThinkDynamic Orchestrator machine.




                                 Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems   71
Figure 3-25 IBM DB2 Server information

               10.At the Installation Preview window you have the chance to review the
                  installation options. Click Next to initiate the installation.




72   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
Figure 3-26 Installation Preview window

11.As IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator is being installed, a panel
   displays showing the progress of the installation. The installation is complete
   when the summary panel displays. If you would like to start the IBM Tivoli
   Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator services immediately, click the check
   box.




                                 Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems   73
Figure 3-27 Installation Summary window




74   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
4


    Chapter 4.   Creating the demonstration
                 This section explains how to build the ITITO data center model and contains the
                 following sections:
                     A discussion of the tools that can be used to build the data center model
                     Guidance on converting the gathered data into an XML input file
                     Sample XML files
                     Advice about loading the data center model
                     Advice about configuring the ITITO simulator to provide a sample load for the
                     demonstration
                     Some areas to test before demonstrating




© Copyright IBM Corp. 2004. All rights reserved.                                                 75
4.1 Tools
               The ITITO data center model (DCM) can be built in one of two ways:
                  Defining each component using the Web management GUI
                  Importing the DCM definitions using one or more XML files

               The advantage of the Web management GUI is that it is easy, although a bit
               time-consuming, but the main disadvantage is that the data center model cannot
               be reused on any other project because there is no export facility in ITITO
               Version 1.1.

               Conversely, building the DCM using XML files can be quite complex,
               time-consuming, and prone to errors. The main advantage of this method is that
               it can be re-used, copied, and extended more easily at any time in the future.
               Building the DCM is the recommended method, and a number of XML files are
               provided as examples.

               A number of software packages are available to edit XML. These range from very
               simple to very complex and expensive. The selection of tools is largely a matter
               of choice and budget. Some advice and guidelines are presented here. The tools
               discussed are:
                  WordPad or Notepad
                  Cooktop
                  XMLSpy

               We discuss the benefits and disadvantages of each tool separately.


4.1.1 WordPad or Notepad
               These editors provide absolutely no assistance with editing XML files. They do
               not guide, validate, or display the XML elements in different colors. A significant
               degree of familiarity with XML structures is recommended if either of these
               editors is chosen. On the plus side, they are always available on every
               Windows-based system, and if quick changes are required, they might be all that
               is needed.


4.1.2 Cooktop
               This is a freeware dedicated XML editor that can be obtained from:
               http://www.xmlcooktop.com. Cooktop is a Windows-only editor that has a small
               download and footprint and provides the following useful facilities:
                  It displays the XML file with color-coded text.
                  It can validate the XML file against the DTD definition file.



76   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
It can display the structure of the XML elements graphically.

                Cooktop has the following disadvantages:
                   It does not allow you to change the XML structures graphically.
                   Some users have reported problems with some of the macros used in Tivoli
                   Orchestrator.

                The following screen capture shows a typical session using the Cooktop XML
                editor:




Figure 4-1 Cooktop XML editor




                                                        Chapter 4. Creating the demonstration   77
This screen capture below shows the XML structure view from Cooktop:




               Figure 4-2 Cooktop XML structure view


4.1.3 XMLSpy
               XMLSpy is a licensed product from Altova systems, available at:
               http://www.altova.com. XMLSpy is available on a 30-day trial basis and requires
               registration with Altova. The tool provides the following features:
                  It allows the XML files to be created and maintained either graphically or text
                  based.
                  It displays XML with color coding.
                  It validates the XML against the DTD file.
                  It does not permit invalid items to be inserted.
                  It is possible to cut and paste structures.
                  It is possible to shrink elements that are not being worked on, thus making it
                  easier to see the current items.

               XMLSpy does have the following limitations:
                  Using the graphical editor can be quite daunting at first and requires a fair bit
                  of practice.
                  It is expensive.



78   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
It does have some bugs!

               The following screen capture shows a typical session using the graphical editor
               in XMLSpy:




Figure 4-3 XMLSpy XML editor



4.2 Designing the data center model
               This section describes the data center modeling process.


4.2.1 ITITO GUI method
               If you choose the GUI method, we recommend that you clean up the ITITO
               database. It will be necessary to reinitialize the ITITO database with a blank
               DCM. This is best achieved by following these steps:
               1. Edit the reinit-exec.bat file in c:cygwinhomethinkcontroltools.


                                                         Chapter 4. Creating the demonstration   79
2. In the reinit-exec.bat file, comment out the line that contains the following with
                  a REM statement:
                      set DCMCFG_FILE=example.xml
               3. Open a command prompt.
               4. Run the batch file:
                      toolsreinit.bat
                  When this completes, the ITITO database will be completely cleared.

               The advantages of the GUI are as follows:
                  It is easy to add components.
                  The GUI provides lists of relevant components in some pull-down menus.
                  It is not possible to insert incorrect objects.
                  It can be quite quick for a small system.

               The disadvantages of the GUI are as follows:
                  It is not currently possible to export the data into an XML format and then
                  reuse it in another system.
                  If the ITITO system is reinitialized, all work is lost.
                  It can be very tedious to add a large number of objects using the GUI.
                  It can be prone to errors if a lot of similar objects are added.

               No specific instructions are provided in this document to guide the reader in
               creating a data center model using the GUI. It is assumed that the reader will be
               familiar with the ITITO GUI and will understand how to use it to create the data
               center components from the data collected. Details can be found in the redbook
               Provisioning On Demand: Introducing IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic
               Orchestrator, SG24-8888.


4.2.2 The XML method
               The ITITO data center model consists of one XML file that contains a number of
               different elements and attributes. Each element has a specific set of child
               elements or attributes according to the design schema, also known as the DTD
               file. For ITITO, the basic data center model file has the following requirements.

               The minimum form of the XML file consists of a DOCTYPE element and a
               datacenter element. The datacenter element, however, is not valid without at
               least one valid child element. In this example, the child element is the
               switch-fabric element with a name Default, as shown here:




80   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="ISO-8859-1"?>
            <!-- edited with XMLSPY v2004 rel. 2 U (http://www.xmlspy.com) by Tony
            French (IBM UK Ltd) -->
            <!--
               DCM: Empty
               Author: A N Other
               Info: This DCM is totally empty awaiting customization
               -->
            <!DOCTYPE datacenter SYSTEM "xmlimport.dtd">
            <datacenter>
               <switch-fabric name="Default"/>
            </datacenter>


         All other elements must be placed between the <datacenter> begin and
         </datacenter> end tags.

         This example will initialize the ITITO data center model with nothing but a switch
         fabric called Default.


4.2.3 DOCTYPE element
         Within the DOCTYPE element, it is possible to code reusable segments of XML
         (entities) that are included in elements defined later. For the demonstration, the
         following entities should be included in the !DOCTYPE definition:

            <!ENTITY workload-cluster SYSTEM "workload-cluster.xml">
            <!ENTITY resourcepoolconfig SYSTEM "resourcepool.xml">
            <!ENTITY dataacquisitionconfig SYSTEM "dataacquisition.xml">
            <!ENTITY simulator-cpu '
               <dae-driver device="server"
            classname="com.thinkdynamics.kanaha.dataacquisitionengine.NullDriver">
               </dae-driver>
               <dae-signal name="cpu-utilization" device="server"
                  metric="cpu-utilization" aggregation="average"
                  filter="low-pass-filter">
               </dae-signal>
            '>
            <!ENTITY simulator-arrival-rate '
               <dae-driver device="load-balancer"
            classname="com.thinkdynamics.kanaha.dataacquisitionengine.NullDriver">
               </dae-driver>
               <dae-signal name="arrival-rate" device="load-balancer"
                  metric="arrival-rate" aggregation="any" filter="low-pass-filter">
               </dae-signal>
               <dae-signal name="raw-arrival-rate" device="load-balancer"
                  metric="arrival-rate" aggregation="any">
               </dae-signal>



                                                  Chapter 4. Creating the demonstration   81
'>
                  <!ENTITY null-load-balancer-dae '
                     <dae-driver device="load-balancer"
                  classname="com.thinkdynamics.kanaha.dataacquisitionengine.ZeroValueDriver">
                     </dae-driver>
                     <dae-signal name="arrival-rate" device="load-balancer"
                        metric="arrival-rate" aggregation="any" filter="low-pass-filter">
                     </dae-signal>
                     <dae-signal name="raw-arrival-rate" device="load-balancer"
                        metric="arrival-rate" aggregation="any" filter="low-pass-filter">
                     </dae-signal>
                  ’>

               Essentially, these entities are instructions to the simulator and provide
               information about how the data is acquired and delivered to the various
               components.


4.2.4 Power supplies
               If power supplies are required, these can be included simply by including a
               power-unit element with the name of the power unit and the device model, as
               shown in the following example:
                  <power-unit name="Power Unit 1" is-device-model="APC-7901-SNMP">
                  </power-unit>


4.2.5 Network components
               The network components in ITITO consist of the following elements:
                  Switch fabric
                  Subnetworks
                  Switches
                  Routers and firewalls
                  Load balancers (variety of switch)
                  Access control lists (ACLs)

               Switch fabric
               The switch fabric element in ITITO is just a name to which other elements refer.
               Multiple switch fabrics can be defined if required. For demonstrations, it is
               recommended that only one be used. The customer’s name can be used if
               required, as shown in the following example:
                  <switch-fabric name="Customer Network">
                  </switch-fabric>




82   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
Subnetworks
Each subnetwork identified in “Subnetworks” on page 9 should be entered using
the subnetwork element together with the VLAN and switch fabric name, as
shown in the following example:
   <subnetwork ipaddress="192.168.1.0" netmask="255.255.255.0">
      <vlan vlan-number="101" fabric="Customer Network"/>
      </vlan>
   </subnetwork>

We recommend that you define all of the subnetworks in one group at this point
in the XML file to aid in locating them when the data center model grows.

In addition, it is a good idea to define the subnetwork of the ITITO server. For the
demonstration system (discussed in Chapter 5, “Demonstration” on page 107)
the ITITO server is on an IP address of 192.168.192.168, so there should be an
additional subnet defined as follows:
   <subnetwork ipaddress="192.168.192.0" netmask="255.255.255.0">
      <vlan vlan-number="192" fabric="Customer Network">
      </vlan>
   </subnetwork>

Switches
Every switch, switch module, and switch port identified in “Switches” on page 10
should be defined in the data center model using the switch element, as shown in
the following example:
<switch name="Switch 1" is-device-model="Dummy Switch"
      fabric="Customer Network" ipaddress="192.168.1.253">
   <switch-module name="fa0">
      <switch-port vlan="101" port-number="1"
          layer1-interface-type="FastEthernet">
      </switch-port>
      <switch-port vlan="101" port-number="2"
          layer1-interface-type="FastEthernet">
      </switch-port>
      <switch-port vlan="101" port-number="3"
          layer1-interface-type="FastEthernet">
      </switch-port>
      <switch-port vlan="101" port-number="4"
          layer1-interface-type="FastEthernet">
      </switch-port>
      <switch-port vlan="192" port-number="5"
          layer1-interface-type="FastEthernet">
      </switch-port>
      <switch-port vlan="101" port-number="6"
          layer1-interface-type="FastEthernet">
      </switch-port>


                                         Chapter 4. Creating the demonstration   83
<switch-port vlan="101" port-number="7"
                         layer1-interface-type="FastEthernet">
                     </switch-port>
                     <switch-port vlan="101" port-number="11"
                         layer1-interface-type="FastEthernet">
                     </switch-port>
                     <switch-port vlan="101" port-number="12"
                         layer1-interface-type="FastEthernet">
                     </switch-port>
                     <switch-port vlan="102" port-number="13"
                         layer1-interface-type="FastEthernet">
                     </switch-port>
                     <switch-port vlan="102" port-number="14"
                         layer1-interface-type="FastEthernet">
                     </switch-port>
                     <switch-port vlan="103" port-number="15"
                         layer1-interface-type="FastEthernet">
                     </switch-port>
                     <switch-port vlan="103" port-number="16"
                         layer1-interface-type="FastEthernet">
                     </switch-port>
                  </switch-module>
                  <power-outlet power-unit="Power Unit 1" outlet-number="1">
                  </power-outlet>
               </switch>

                Note: For this switch, there is a reference to a power unit. If power units are
                not required, this can be omitted. We recommend that you define all of the
                switches in one group for clarity.


               Routers and firewalls
               In ITITO routers and firewalls are types of switches. Each router and firewall
               identified in “Routers and firewalls” on page 11 should be defined using the
               switch element and a number of network-interface child elements. Firewalls
               should be identified with the firewall element, which takes no parameters. In this
               example, the network interface contains a reference to an access control list that
               is defined later.
                  <switch name="Router 1" is-device-model="Dummy Switch"
                  fabric="Customer Network">
                     <network-interface name="Management" ipaddress="192.168.1.254"
                        managed="false">
                        <route subnetwork="192.168.2.0" gateway="192.168.1.254">
                        </route>
                        <route subnetwork="192.168.3.0" gateway="192.168.1.254">
                        </route>
                        <acl-ref type="1" name="ACL-1" enabled="true">
                        </acl-ref>


84   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
</network-interface>
      <network-interface name="TIO" ipaddress="192.168.192.254"
         managed="false">
         <route subnetwork="192.168.1.0" gateway="192.168.192.254">
         </route>
         <acl-ref type="1" name="ACL-2" enabled="true">
         </acl-ref>
      </network-interface>
      <firewall/>
      <power-outlet power-unit="Power Unit 1" outlet-number="2">
      </power-outlet>
   </switch>

Access control lists (ACLs)
Each ACL identified in “Access control lists” on page 12 should be defined using
the acl element, as shown in the following example:
   <acl name="ACL-1">
      <rule position="1" target="permit" source-subnet="192.168.1.0"
          destination-subnet="192.168.2.0">
      </rule>
      <rule position="2" target="permit" source-subnet="192.168.2.0"
          destination-subnet="192.168.1.0">
      </rule>
   </acl>

For the purposes of a demonstration, it will probably not be necessary to define
the ports used by each ACL.

Load balancers
Load balancers are defined with the load-balancer element. The following
example shows the definition of a dummy load balancer to be used for
demonstration purposes only:
   <load-balancer name="Load Balancer 1" is-device-model="Dummy LB"
      type="arrowpoint-load-balancer" ipaddress="192.168.1.252">
   </load-balancer>

Virtual IPs
Each virtual IP name used by the load balancers should be defined using the
virtual-ip address, as shown in this example:
   <virtual-ip name="Web Sales" load-balancer="Load Balancer 1"
      virtual-ip-address="192.168.1.250" in-tcp-port-first="80"
      in-tcp-port-last="80" out-tcp-port="80"/>
   </virtual-ip>




                                        Chapter 4. Creating the demonstration   85
Each cluster that is to demonstrate automatic provisioning should reference a
               virtual IP, so ensure that one is defined for each of these clusters.


4.2.6 Software
               The three categories of software (software package, software patch, and
               software stack identified in 2.3.3, “Software” on page 14 are defined, as shown in
               the following examples.

               Software package
               Software packages are defined with the software element type, for example:
                  <software name="Windows 2000" version="2000"
                     package_path="d:repositoryWin2000" type="OPERATING_SYSTEM"
                     install_path="c:winnt">
                  </software>

               Software patch
               Any software patches required can be defined using the software-patch element:
                  <software-patch name="Windows 2000 Service Pack 4" package_path="c:"
                        reboot="true">
                  </software-patch>

               Software stack
               Finally, software packages and software patches are grouped into software
               stacks using a combination of the software-stack and software-stack-product
               elements, as shown in this example:
                  <software-stack name="Windows 2000 Server">
                     <software-stack-product product-name="Windows 2000" position="1"
                        expected-state="running">
                     </software-stack-product>
                     <software-stack-product product-name="Windows 2000 Service Pack 4"
                        position="2" expected-state="running"/>
                     </software-stack-product>
                  </software-stack>


4.2.7 Spare pools
               Each collection of spare similar servers identified in 2.3.4, “Spare pools” on
               page 16 should be defined by the spare-pool element containing a number of
               server elements, in turn, containing NIC and network-interface elements.




86   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
Note: For these servers, it is usually a good idea to have multiple network
            interface cards at least one of which is reserved for managing the server and
            is marked as not managed by ITITO. Other network cards can be set to
            managed, which will allow ITITO to assign change and remove IP addresses
            (network interfaces) when required. Obviously, if all the network interface
            cards are set to managed, ITITO could attempt to change the IP address of
            the network interface it is using to communicate with the server with
            unpredictable results!

              <spare-pool name="Intel Pool" os-type="" vlan="101"
                    fabric="Customer Network">
                 <server name="x330-1">
                    <nic managed="false" connected-to-switch="Switch 1"
                        connected-to-module="fa0" connected-to-port="1">
                        <network-interface name="Management" ipaddress="192.168.1.3"
                           managed="false"/>
                        </network-interface>
                    </nic>
                    <nic managed="true" connected-to-switch="Switch 1"
                           connected-to-module="fa0" connected-to-ort="11">
                    </nic>
                 </server>
              </spare-pool>

           ITITO requires that the ITITO servers are defined to the system and placed in a
           resource pool. For this demonstration, it is not strictly necessary, but it is
           worthwhile showing this by including the following resource pool definition:
              <spare-pool name="TIO Server" os-type="" vlan="192"
                    fabric="Customer Network">
                 <server name="wink">
                    <nic managed="false" connected-to-switch="Switch 1"
                        connected-to-module="fa0" connected-to-port="5">
                        <network-interface managed="false" ipaddress="192.168.192.168"/>
                    </nic>
                 </server>
              </spare-pool>


4.2.8 ITITO configuration
           There are a number of general settings for ITITO that control the operation of the
           whole system that need to be defined in the data center model. These settings
           include global parameters, data acquisition parameters, and also the inclusion of
           macros for certain components.




                                                   Chapter 4. Creating the demonstration   87
These configuration parameters are defined with the kanaha-config element that
               has a single child element of dcm-object.

               One of the most important elements that should be created under the dcm-object
               element is a properties element with the ID of 0. This element contains the global
               variables for the whole system including items such as the operations mode, the
               default source host and directory for software packages, and the temporary path.
               For a demonstration, the actual locations of the software packages are not
               important, but can be useful to show the customer where these values are
               defined. Some parameters available include:

               Table 4-1 Deployment engine global variables
                Component                   Name                       Value (with samples)

                RESOURCE_BROKER             OperationsMode-current     manual

                DEPLOYMENT_ENGINE           PackageUtilPath            /opt/zip

                DEPLOYMENT_ENGINE           PackageScriptPath          /home/thinkcontrol/script

                DEPLOYMENT_ENGINE           PackageTempFilePath        /tmp

                DEPLOYMENT_ENGINE           PackageIntermediateHost    192.168.1.200

                DEPLOYMENT_ENGINE           PackageRepositoryHost      192.168.1.200

                DEPLOYMENT_ENGINE           PackageRepositoryDir       /usr/local/kanaha/upload

                DEPLOYMENT_ENGINE           PackageWebHost             192.168.1.200

                DEPLOYMENT_ENGINE           PackageWebDir              /usr/local/kanaha/apps


               The following example shows a typical kanaha-config element that we
               recommend you load in the demonstration data center model:
                  <kanaha-config>
                  <dcm-object id="0">
                     <property component="RESOURCE_BROKER" name="OperationsMode-current"
                               value="manual">
                     </property>
                     <property component="APPLICATION_CONTROLLER"
                               name="predictor-prediction-interval-msec" value="900001">
                     </property>
                     <property component="APPLICATION_CONTROLLER"
                               name="predictor-type.1.class"
                  value="com.thinkdynamics.kanaha.controller.appcontroller.predictor.DefaultP
                  redictor">
                     </property>
                     <property component="APPLICATION_CONTROLLER"




88   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
name="predictor-type.1.enable" value="true">
   </property>
   <property component="APPLICATION_CONTROLLER"
             name="predictor-type.2.class"
value="com.thinkdynamics.kanaha.controller.appcontroller.predictor.LinearTr
endPredictor">
   </property>
   <property component="APPLICATION_CONTROLLER"
             name="predictor-type.2.enable" value="false">
   </property>
   <property component="APPLICATION_CONTROLLER"
             name="predictor-type.3.class"
value="com.thinkdynamics.kanaha.controller.appcontroller.predictor.OneDayPr
edictor">
   </property>
   <property component="APPLICATION_CONTROLLER"
             name="predictor-type.3.enable" value="false">
   </property>
   <property component="APPLICATION_CONTROLLER"
             name="predictor-type.4.class"
value="com.thinkdynamics.kanaha.controller.appcontroller.predictor.OneWeekP
redictor">
   </property>
   <property component="APPLICATION_CONTROLLER"
             name="predictor-type.4.enable" value="false">
   </property>
   <property component="DEPLOYMENT_ENGINE" name="PackageUtilPath"
             value="/opt/zip">
   </property>
   <property component="DEPLOYMENT_ENGINE" name="PackageScriptPath"
             value="/home/thinkcontrol/script">
   </property>
   <property component="DEPLOYMENT_ENGINE" name="PackageTempFilePath"
             value="/tmp">
   </property>
   <property component="DEPLOYMENT_ENGINE" name="PackageIntermediateHost"
             value="192.168.1.200">
   </property>
   <property component="DEPLOYMENT_ENGINE" name="PackageRepositoryHost"
             value="192.168.1.200">
   </property>
   <property component="DEPLOYMENT_ENGINE" name="PackageRepositoryDir"
             value="/usr/local/kanaha/upload">
   </property>
   <property component="DEPLOYMENT_ENGINE" name="PackageWebHost"
             value="192.168.1.200">
   </property>
   <property component="DEPLOYMENT_ENGINE" name="PackageWebDir"
             value="/usr/local/kanaha/apps">



                                   Chapter 4. Creating the demonstration   89
</property>
                     &resourcepoolconfig;
                     &dataacquisitionconfig;
                  </dcm-object>
                  </kanaha-config>

               The first parameter listed here is the global operations mode of the ITITO
               system. In this case, it is set to manual, although it could be set to automatic if
               required.

               For a demonstration, it might be advisable to start the demonstration in manual
               mode and then to switch to automatic using the GUI after the basic principles
               have been shown. This will be explained more in the next chapter.


4.2.9 Customers
               Each customer, application, cluster, and dedicated server identified in 2.3.5,
               “Applications and customers” on page 16 must be defined using the customer,
               application, cluster, and server elements that must be defined in the
               corresponding hierarchy.

               The following example shows a single server for one cluster in an application for
               one customer:
                  <customer name="Customer">
                     <application name="Internet Sales" priority="1">
                        <cluster name="Sales Web Servers" min-servers="1" max-servers="5"
                            vlan="102" fabric="Customer Network" pool="Intel Pool"
                            managed="true" is-device-model="Simulator"
                            virtual-ipaddress="Sales Web">
                            <with-load-balancer name="Load Balancer 1"/>
                            <server name="SalesWebSrv01">
                               <nic connected-to-switch="Switch 1"
                                      connected-to-module="fa0" connected-to-port="13"
                                      managed="false">
                                      <network-interface name="Local Area Connection"
                                         ipaddress="192.168.2.3"/>
                                      </network>
                                  </nic>
                               </server>
                        </cluster>
                     </application>
                  </customer>

                Note: The virtual IP address is set for this cluster. This is important for the
                simulator to be able to provision servers automatically.




90   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
4.3 Sample XML files
         Included with this document are some sample XML files that can be used as a
         reference or to help the reader get started. Two examples are available:
            The Cookbook example, from which the segments in the previous section
            were taken.
            The XML file used in Provisioning On Demand: Introducing IBM Tivoli
            Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator, SG24-8888.

         Both examples have corresponding simulator definitions. In addition, the
         demonstration system itself contains a data center model and simulator
         parameters for the U.S. open environment.


4.3.1 Cookbook example DCM
         The example that provided the fragments of XML in the previous section is based
         on the following physical design of a data center. See Figure 4-4 on page 92.

         In this data center, there are two applications: Human Resources and Internet
         Sales. Each is a two-tier application with a Web server tier and a database tier.
         The Web servers of each use Intel machines and Microsoft IIS, but the database
         servers use SQL server on Intel and DB2 on AIX, respectively. Each tier/cluster
         has one dedicated server, that is, a server that is not under ITITO control. The
         SQL server machine is not to take part in automatic provisioning.

         The production servers are all attached to switch Prod-SW-1 and have dedicated
         VLANs. The load balancer Load Balancer 1 balances the workload.

         There is a pool of eight Intel machines with dual network cards. One card is
         attached to the production network switch, and the other is attached to a
         management LAN using Switch 1. There is also a pool of one RS/6000®
         machine that is similarly attached and can be used to provide some relief to the
         Human Resources database when required. All the spare pools are in VLAN
         101.

         The ITITO server is attached to the management LAN, but has its own VLAN.

         Finally, traffic is routed between all the VLANs by the router Router 1.

         This XML can be found in the file Demo-Cookbook.xml.

         The simulator parameters can be found in the file:
         Demo-Cookbook-tdnetwork.xml




                                                  Chapter 4. Creating the demonstration   91
Figure 4-4 Sample network infrastructure


4.3.2 Redbook example
                 Full details of the redbook example can be found in Provisioning On Demand:
                 Introducing IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator, SG24-8888.

                 The data center model for the redbook has been modified to use the simulator
                 rather than the real servers and load balancers.

                 The redbook data center model can be found in the file Redbook-simulator.xml.



92    Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
The simulator parameters for the redbook example can be found in the file
         Redbook-tdnetworks.xml.



4.4 Loading the data center model
         The XML data center model must be placed in the cygwinhomethinkcontrolxml
         folder, although the actual name of the file is unimportant. To load the XML file
         and reinitialize the database it is necessary to do the following:
         1. Edit the file reinit-exec.bat in cygwinhomethinkcontroltools.
         2. Change the line that contains set DCMCFG_FILE=example.xml in the
            reinit-exec.bat file so that the new XML file is specified, for example:
               set DCMCFG_FILE=Demo-Cookbook.xml
         3. Open a command window.
         4. Make sure the directory is homethinkcontrol.
         5. Run the command toolsreinit.bat.

          Note: Be patient! This process can take 30-45 minutes, depending on the
          hardware used to support the environment.

         To follow the progress, you can open a new command window and enter the
         following command in order to see the entries put into the log file:
            tail –f %tc_home%logsreinit.log

         After no new lines are added, the process has completed.

         If this command returns with no Java errors, the data center model has loaded
         successfully, and ITITO can now be started. If any errors have been identified, it
         is necessary to debug these and reinitialize the database before proceeding.

         It can be quite tricky to determine the nature of any loading errors. The best
         method consists of locating the type of element in which the error has occurred.
         This is much easier if all the elements are grouped together as recommended.
         Typical errors include:
            Referring to a non-existing element.
            Missing attributes for an element.
            Specifying an incorrect format for an IP address.
            Specifying an alphanumeric character where a numeric is expected.
            Specifying a device driver that does not exist.




                                                   Chapter 4. Creating the demonstration   93
As a last resort, it might be necessary to remove elements of the XML file and
               reload to determine which parts are not correct.

               If problems are experienced, it is sometimes helpful to build each section of the
               XML file in turn. If you follow this order, referential errors can be avoided:
               1. Configure the XML file with power supplied only.
               2. Add the network components:
                  a.   Add subnetworks.
                  b.   Add switches.
                  c.   Add ACLs.
                  d.   Add routers, firewalls, and load balancers.
                  e.   Add virtual IPs.
               3. Add the software configuration.
               4. Add any miscellaneous components:
                  a. Add terminal servers.
                  b. Add blade center management servers.
                  c. Add boot servers.
               5. Add the spare pools.
               6. Add the ITITO configuration.
               7. Finally, add the customer configuration.


4.4.1 Tip for creating XML files using text editors
               If a text editor is used to build the XML file, it can get rather large and unwieldy.
               One method of coping with this is to create separate files for each component
               type and then to assemble them prior to loading. For example, a number of files
               are available:
                  Header section in the 1-Header.xmf file.
                  Power supply section in the 2-power-units.xmf file.
                  Networks section in the 3-Networks.xmf file.
                  Software, software stack, and software patch in the 4-software.xmf file.
                  Boot server definition. A Rembo server example is provided in the
                  5-bootserver.xmf file.
                  Resource pools in the 6-pools.xmf file.
                  ITITO variables in the 7-configvariables.xmf file.
                  Customer definition in the 8-customer.xmf file.
                  Terminal server, blade server, and so on in the 9-other.xmf file.



94   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
Finally, the datacenter terminator tag in the 10-trailer.xmf file.

           Note: The extension .xmf is used here to distinguish the files from XML files and
           means an XML fragment.

           It will then be possible to concatenate the files together (in the right order, from 1
           to 10) into an XML file with the following command:
              Cat xmf_file >> DCM-file.xml

           Where, xmf_file is the fragment file described above.

           The XML file can then be loaded as before.

           Furthermore, it is a good idea to have separate files for each type of component
           as long as they have the correct prefix, for example, 5-SparePool-Intel.xmf,
           5-SparePool-Linux.xmf, or 5-SparePool-AIX.xmf.


4.5 Configuring the simulator
           The ITITO simulator is configured using a number of parameters in the data
           center model and also in the tdnetwork.xml file in the
           /cygwin/home/thinkcontrol/config folder.


4.5.1 Data center model
           Each cluster that takes part in the simulation must have the source of the data
           acquisition data defined and a simulation workload model associated with this
           source.

           The data acquisition properties are defined in the XML data center model, and
           the simulation workload model is defined in the tdnetwork.xml file.

           For the purposes of a demonstration, each cluster requires a dcm-object element
           to be defined as follows within the kanaha-config element:
              <dcm-object type="cluster" name="Sales Web Servers">
                           &workload-cluster;
                           <data-acquisition>
                           &simulator-cpu;
                           &simulator-arrival-rate;
                           </data-acquisition>
              </dcm-object>

           In this case, the texts &workload-cluster;, &simulator-cpu;, and
           &simulator-arrival-rate; refer to entities defined in the DOCTYPE element and


                                                     Chapter 4. Creating the demonstration    95
essentially are variable names that refer to macros. If the XML file is viewed with
               a Web browser, it can be seen that the variable name is replaced with the full
               definition from the DOCTYPE element.

               It is also possible to define these data acquisition properties within each cluster,
               but we recommend for simplicity in defining demonstrations that they are just
               defined in the kanaha-config element.


4.5.2 The tdnetworks file
               The tdnetworks file consists of three main sections under the simulator element:
                  Cluster-type
                  Schedule
                  Application traffic functions

               The simulator element contains the enable attribute that allows the simulator to
               be running at startup or stopped.

               The tdnetworks cluster type element
               The cluster-type element allows for different scaling factors to be applied to the
               traffic functions by particular types of cluster. However, it appears that in the
               Version 1.1 of ITITO that only one type of cluster is supported: UNKNOWN.

               This element is used to set the arrival rate, CPU utilization, and response times
               for the cluster type. In ITITO V1.1, the response times are not used, so they can
               be ignored.

               The CPU utilization parameter sets the percent of CPU used by a single
               transaction and the constant CPU percent. These parameters are specified as
               fractions of 1.

               The tdnetworks schedule element
               The schedule element controls startup and the sampling interval of the simulator.

               This element has two attributes expressed in milliseconds:
                  Startup-delay
                  Iteration

               The tdnetworks application traffic element
               Finally, the application traffic function allows a simulated workload to be applied
               to each cluster by using various functions; it is possible to increase or decrease
               the workload in smooth ramps or steps using the various parameters available.




96   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
The simulator provides two functions for simulating a workload: a step function
and a ramp function. The step function simulates a constant workload for a
specified duration, and the ramp function simulates a rising or falling workload
from an initial position.

The step function requires the following parameters:
   Duration (in milliseconds)
   Amplitude (expressed as a percentage of the max_amplitude defined for the
   application)

The ramp function requires the following parameters:
   Slope (expressed as a ratio of transactions/millisecond, for example, 45
   degrees upwards = 1, and 45 degrees downwards = -1)
   Duration (in milliseconds)
   Initial value (expressed as a percentage of the max)

 Important: For a demonstration of automatic provisioning, it will be necessary
 to define a workload for each of the customer’s applications. Note that the
 workload is set at the application level and not cluster.

If the customer is able to provide a graph of a typical workload for each
application, this could be used to build the simulator functions. For example, the
following graph might represent two typical workloads:
   An office environment where there is little work before 9:00 a.m., then as staff
   come into work, the workload increases until lunch when it dips down until the
   afternoon before tailing off for the evening.
   A Web environment where there are a number of users before 9:00 a.m., then
   as the users go into work, the workload drops until lunch when some users
   might log on again before going back to work in the afternoon until the
   evening then there is a steady workload. In this example, surprisingly nobody
   is using the Internet application in the afternoon!




                                         Chapter 4. Creating the demonstration   97
Workload


                             1200


                             1000


                             800

                Workload %                                                              Office workload
                             600
                                                                                        Internet workload

                             400


                             200


                                  0
                              00


                                      00


                                            0


                                                  0


                                                        0


                                                              0


                                                                      0


                                                                              0


                                                                                   0
                                            :0


                                                  :0


                                                        :0


                                                              :0


                                                                     :0


                                                                           :0


                                                                                   :0
                             6:


                                      8:

                                           10


                                                 12


                                                       14


                                                             16


                                                                    18


                                                                          20


                                                                                  22
                                                             Time


               Figure 4-5 Workload during the day

               When looking at the workload depicted above, it is obvious that the
               representation is focused on the relative amount of work that needs to be
               performed, not on any actual numbers. When trying to simulate this workload, we
               need to establish some point of reference by which we can quantify the amount
               of work. For example, does 100% workload mean 5 or 1000000 simultaneous
               transactions?

               For the purpose of the discussion, we assume in the following that 100%
               workload is achieved at 1000 simultaneous transactions.

               Now, with a proper reference point to set the scales of the above chart, we also
               need to know how much one transaction loads a system in our configuration. The
               correlation between a transaction and cpu-load allows us to translate workload
               into processing need, and thus simulate CPU usage and allocation of servers.

               For the sake of the discussion, let us assume that one transaction generates 5%
               load on a system. Here, we do not distinguish between different types of
               systems, because all the systems that will be allocated to support a workload will
               have similar configurations, and thus the use of a general number for load per
               transaction will not influence the calculations.




98   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
The simulator functions required to simulate the above office workload are as
follows:

Table 4-2 Simulator functions for the sample Office workload
 Function         Slope             Duration          Initial value    Amplitude

 StepFunction                       12000                              20

 RampFunction                       6000              20

 StepFunction                       12000                              100

 RampFunction     -1                6000              100

 StepFunction                       12000                              100

 RampFunction                       6000              50

 StepFunction                       12000                              100

 RampFunction                       6000              100

 StepFunction                       30000                              20


The simulator functions that represent the above Internet workload are as
follows:

Table 4-3 Simulator functions for the sample Office workload
 Function         Slope             Duration          Initial value    Amplitude

 StepFunction                       18000                              75

 RampFunction     -1                6000              75

 StepFunction                       6000                               25

 RampFunction                       6000              25

 StepFunction                       12000                              100

 RampFunction     -3                6000              100

 StepFunction                       12000                              0

 RampFunction                       6000

 StepFunction                       12000                              100

 RampFunction     -1                6000              100

 StepFunction                       12000                              75




                                            Chapter 4. Creating the demonstration   99
Calculating the number of systems
              Knowing the workload over time as a percentage of the total workload,
              unfortunately, does not indicate how many transactions are being initiated or how
              much computing power is required to support the workload. To deduce the
              number of servers required running the workload, we have to look at the
              cluster_type properties again and combine these with our workload numbers.

              From the cluster_type element, the value for the scale property tells us how much
              cpu-load each transaction generates and the value for the constant property
              indicates what the system overhead, or idle load, is. For a max_amplitude of an
              application of 1000000 and a scale of 0.05, we can deduct that the total
              requirement for CPU at 75% workload is:
              75%*1000000 transactions *0.05 %cpu/transaction = 37500 %cpu = 375 cpus

              This almost translates to a requirement for 375 servers each using all their
              capacity to support our workload.

              When calculating the required servers, we have to adjust this number to account
              for the fact that each system cannot provide 100% CPU to support the workload.
              First of all, the system needs a few cycles for system overhead, which is
              represented by the constant property of the cpu_utilization parameter of the
              cluster_type entry. In the following, we assume that the value for constant is 0.01.

              In addition, the systems are never fully 100 percent committed to specific
              workload. From the Service Level Objective specified for the application,
              Platinum, Gold, or Silver, we know that more resources will be allocated to the
              application clusters when the average CPR utilization reaches a predefined
              cut_off value. The default values are 75%, 80%, and 90%, respectively. This
              implies that for an application with a Silver SLA, new systems are allocated when
              the average CPU load reaches 90%. Taking the idle load into account, we realize
              that the fraction of each system that will be used to execute our workload is:
                  Effective_CPU = Cut_off – constant

              For a Silver application with a constant of 0.01, the effective_CPU will be:
                  Effective_CPU = 0.90 – 0.01 = 0.89

              Therefore, to adjust the calculation of needed required servers to account for
              these factors, the formula for the total number of required servers for to support a
              workload is:
                  Workload% * ( max_amplitude * scale) / (cut_off – constant)

              Using the numbers in our example, we get:
                  75% * (1000000 * 0.05)/100*(0.90 – 0.01) = 422 servers
                  4.5.2.3.2 Calculating the RampFunction slope



100   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
As seen above, when working with RampFunctions you have to specify the
starting point, in terms of the percent fraction of the max_amplitude, and a slope
to describe the curve. This can seem somewhat awkward compared to
specifying starting and ending workload percentages, so in the following
example, we demonstrate how to calculate slope based on pure workload data.

As described earlier, the slope is a number indicating the growth (or decline) of
transactions per time unit, and you might remember that the amplitudes denote
fractions (in percent) of the max_amplitude defined for an application. Combining
this information you can deduct that the slope, in terms of transaction increase or
decrease over time, can be calculated as follows:
   Slope =
   (Max_amplitude * (Ending_amplitude – Starting-amplitude)/100) / duration

Please note that the starting_amplitude is also known as initial_value.

To deduct the amplitudes, as percentages of max_amplitude, we have to involve
the scale attribute of the cpu_utilization parameter of the cluster_type entry. The
scale specifies how much one transaction loads a system. Combining this
information with the amplitudes allows us to work with CPU load instead of
slopes.

Assuming the following:
   Scale = 0.05 (5% cpu load for each transaction)
   Max_amplitude = 100000
   Initial_value= 23% cpu
   Duration= 60000 milliseconds (one minute)
   Desired ending amplitude = 75%

We can calculate the slope as follows:
   Workload_growth (ending_load – starting_load) = 75%-23% = 52%
   Growth in transactions: workload_growth *max_amplitude =
                 0.52*1000000 = 520000 transactions
   slope = transactions / duration520000/60000 = 8.6667

Now that we know how much the workload increases over time, we can calculate
the number of additional servers needed to support this load:
   Growth in CPU demand: growth in transactions*scale =
             520000*0.05 = 26000 %cpu
   Growth # of servers = Growth in CPU demand/100*(cut_off– constant) =
             26000/(0.90-0.01)*100 = 293 servers

To determine the amount of servers needed to support this resulting workload,
we see:




                                         Chapter 4. Creating the demonstration   101
Ending server demand_ =
                  (starting load*max_amplitude + slope*duration)*scale/(cut_off – constant)
                  = (0.23*1000000 + 8.6667*60000) * 0.05/(0.90 – 0.01)*100
                  = 422 servers

                Note: To ease the calculations of workload and the required number of
                servers to sustain this, we have provided a small, self-explaining spreadsheet
                to help you.

              The simulator parameters, which can be found in the provided
              Demo-Cookbook-tdnetwork.xml, needed to generate a workload for two
              applications, Human Resources and Internet Sales of our Demo-Cookbook
              (Demo-Cookbook.xml) DCM, are as follows:
                  <?xml version="1.0"?>
                  <!-- edited with XMLSPY v2004 rel. 2 U (http://www.xmlspy.com) by Tony
                  French (IBM UK Ltd) -->
                  <td_network>
                  <Version>0.80-032001</Version>
                  <simulator enable="true">
                  <cluster-type name="UNKNOWN">
                  <!--These parameters define a CPU utilization per transaction of 5%. There
                  is a constant overhead of 1% s for the transaction. Each transaction can
                  only cause a maximum cpu load of 100%. The response time values are not
                  used.-->
                     <simulation-parameters name="arrival-rate" noise-scale="0.0"
                            output-ratio="0.25">
                     </simulation-parameters>
                     <simulation-parameters name="cpu-utilization" scale="0.05"
                            constant="0.01" max="1">
                     </simulation-parameters>
                     <simulation-parameters name="response-time" scale="1.0" constant="77.0"
                            max="100">
                     </simulation-parameters>
                  </cluster-type>
                  <!-- sets the DAE polling period (in milliseconds) for all simulated
                  clusters. -->
                  <schedule startup-delay="5000" iteration-period="20000">
                  <!--The parameters here specify that the simulator will only start
                  processing 5 secs after it starts and poll for new data every 20 secs-->
                  </schedule>
                  <application_traffic_functions>
                  <!--Each Application requires a workload model-->
                  <!--Slope is the ratio of the height of the slope over the length of the
                  slope. Hence 1 = 45 degrees -->
                     <app_function app_name="Human Resources" max_amplitude="1000000">
                  <!--This Application has a workload model that resembles the typical
                  daytime office hours workload. I.e a peak at 9:am steady workload until



102   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
12:00 a drop until 2 and a peak until 5pm and not much overnight.-->
   <function function_type="StepFunction" duration="12000" amplitude="20">
   </function>
   <function function_type="RampFunction" slope="2" duration="6000"
                init_value="20" amplitude="100">
   </function>
   <function function_type="StepFunction" duration="12000"
                amplitude="100">
   </function>
   <function function_type="RampFunction" slope="-1" duration="6000"
                init_value="100" amplitude="50">
   </function>
   <function function_type="StepFunction" duration="12000" amplitude="50">
   </function>
   <function function_type="RampFunction" slope="1" duration="6000"
                init_value="50" amplitude="100">
   </function>
   <function function_type="StepFunction" duration="12000"
                amplitude="100">
   </function>
   <function function_type="RampFunction" slope="-2" duration="6000"
                init_value="100" amplitude="20">
   </function>
   <function function_type="StepFunction" duration="30000" amplitude="0"/>
</app_function>
<app_function app_name="Internet Sales" max_amplitude="1000000">
<!--This workload is intended to represent web traffic that is at 75%
overnight, tails off during the morning, Hits Max at lunchtime 75% in the
afternoon, Peak in the evening and back to 75% late evening-->
   <function function_type="StepFunction" duration="18000" amplitude="75">
   </function>
   <function function_type="RampFunction" slope="-1" duration="60000"
                init_value="75" amplitude="">
   </function>
   <function function_type="StepFunction" duration="60000" amplitude="25">
   </function>
   <function function_type="RampFunction" slope="2" duration="60000"
                init_value="25" amplitude="">
   </function>
   <function function_type="StepFunction" duration="12000"
                amplitude="100">
   </function>
   <function function_type="RampFunction" slope="-3" duration="6000"
                init_value="100">
   </function>
   <function function_type="StepFunction" duration="12000" amplitude="0">
   </function>
   <function function_type="RampFunction" slope="3" duration="6000"
                init_value="0" amplitude="">



                                  Chapter 4. Creating the demonstration   103
</function>
                     <function function_type="StepFunction" duration="12000"
                                  amplitude="100">
                     </function>
                     <function function_type="RampFunction" slope="-1" duration="6000"
                                  init_value="100" amplitude="">
                     </function>
                     <function function_type="StepFunction" duration="12000" amplitude="75">
                     </function>
                  </app_function>
                  </application_traffic_functions>
                  </simulator>
                  </td_network>

              Simulating multiple workloads
              When using the simulator to demonstrate multiple workloads orchestrated
              simultaneously by ITITO, you should be aware of the limitation in the current
              release, which only allows for the UNKNOWN cluster_type entry.

              The effect of not being able to specify multiple cluster_types forces you to use the
              same value for the constant property (the system overhead) for all applications,
              no matter which platforms are used to support the application-specific workload.
              This can be regarded as a small inconvenience, which can be overcome by
              defining the smallest value for the constant property and adding extra
              transactions to selected workloads to simulate extra idle load.

              Assuming that you have three workloads running on three different platforms with
              the current characteristics:
                  App1    real_scale=0.05 idle_load=0.01        real_max_amplitude=1000
                  App2    real_scale=0.01 idle_load=0.05        real_max_amplitude=10000
                  App3    real_scale=0.02 idle_load=0.03        real_max_amplitude=500

              You would specify the lowest of the three idle_load values (0.001, the one from
              App1) as the value for the constant property of the Unknown cluster_type
              definition. To signal to the simulator that the idle_load in fact is higher than 1% for
              App2 and App3, you have to increase all workload percentages to take the higher
              idle_load into account. The increase must match the missing idle_load in terms
              of %cpu, so for each application, you have to add (idle_load
              –constant)*max_amplitude*scale percent workload for each value for
              initial_value and amplitude in the application_load statements. For App2, the
              value will be (0.05 – 0.01)* 10000*0.01 = 4% or 0.04. For App3, the increase is
              (0.03 – 0.01)*500*0.02 = 0.2% or 0.002.

              The limitation of supported cluster_type entries in the current implementation of
              ITITO also applies to the value for the scale property. It is highly unlikely that all
              application transactions load the supporting platforms equally. Therefore,


104   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
because you can only specify one value the scale property, you must specify the
         lowest one of the applications you will be simulating, and adjust the
         max-amplitude for the other applications accordingly.

         In our example, we would specify a common value for scale of 0.01, which comes
         from App2. Using this value for all the applications, the simulated workload for
         App1 would be one fifth of the anticipated workload and half of the anticipated
         workload for App3. Because all workloads are specified as percentages of the
         max_amplitude, all we need to do to compensate for the lower scale is to multiply
         the real_max_amplitude for App1 and App3 by a factor of (real_scale/scale),
         which is 5 and 2, respectively, for the two applications in question.



4.6 Testing
         Before demonstrating the system to the customer, it should be adequately tested,
         and ideally, a complete walk through of the demonstration should be performed
         first. Ensure that the following key areas are working:
            The GUI loads and the switch fabric can be opened.
            The icon view of the switch fabric is available.
            Drill down to a switch to view the ports, and so on.
            Optionally, use the GUI to turn a switch port on or off. (Only attempt this if the
            switch has the dummy switch device driver.)
            Open a resource pool and examine the servers. Make sure that the NICs and
            interfaces are defined as needed.
            Open a software package and check its contents.
            Check that the software package is included in relevant software stacks.
            Open the customer and make sure that the applications and clusters are
            defined correctly.
            Display the server view from a cluster that will use automatic provisioning.
            Make sure that the simulator is generating a workload for the servers in these
            clusters. (They will have a bar chart of CPU utilization if it is.)
            Switch a cluster into manual mode.
            Add a server to the cluster. Check that the deployment succeeded and that
            the server was added.
            Return to the switch fabric view and ensure that the managed port on the
            server has been moved to a new VLAN.
            Remove a server from the cluster. Check that it was removed successfully.



                                                 Chapter 4. Creating the demonstration    105
Switch the demonstration to automatic mode.
                  Make sure that servers are added and removed from the application clusters
                  as the workload rises and falls.
                  Select the Overview and make sure that the 3D view is working.




106   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
5


    Chapter 5.   Demonstration
                 This section explains the main points for demonstrating ITITO and contains the
                 following sections:
                     Introduction to ITITO and the scenario
                     Data center assets and resources
                     Customer applications
                     Real-time performance monitoring




© Copyright IBM Corp. 2004. All rights reserved.                                            107
5.1 Introduction to ITITO and the scenario
              You should probably start with the presentation with a quick overview of ITITO.
              You should familiarize the customer with the main capabilities of ITITO,
              especially the ones you have agreed to demonstrate during the initial interview.

              The following section has been extracted from Provisioning On Demand:
              Introducing IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator, SG24-8888.


5.1.1 ITITO: A quick overview
              The following figure shows a typical example of a data center running three
              applications, in which one application needs additional resources to attend to
              user demand, while the other two have enough, or even extra, resources
              allocated to them. Traditional, manual provisioning practices do not make it
              practical to move resources from one application to another to meet short-term
              peaks in demand. Instead, we engage in what we call the just-in-case
              provisioning cycle:




              Figure 5-1 Traditional just-in-case provisioning




108   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
IBM has changed the provisioning paradigm from just-in-case to just-in-time with
IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator by managing resources
information and to enhance automation. ITITO dynamically moves computing
resources to support the applications with the greater immediate impact on the
business just-in-time to meet user demand. Therefore, an organization can reach
higher levels of automation and rapidly respond to fluctuating business demands
on the IT infrastructure, in line with the overall business goals of the organization.

ITITO automates the traditional, manual provisioning process, performance
measurement, capacity planning, and infrastructure deployment. ITITO operates
in a closed loop that performs automatic resource requirements prediction,
based on predefined service level objectives and agreements, and automates
infrastructure deployment. This just-in-time cycle ensures that each application
has the resource it needs, when it needs it, without static over provisioning.




Figure 5-2 Orchestrated Just-in-Time provisioning

Although any application can be allocated to any server at any time, a server
could be built specifically for an application when it needs it and is subsequently
deallocated when it is no longer needed by the application.




                                                     Chapter 5. Demonstration    109
5.2 Data center assets and resources
              When the demonstration has been created, it should represent a network
              configuration that you and the customer have agreed upon. Show the customer
              the schematic representation of the environment you have created.


5.2.1 Show the switch fabric and inventory resources
              Select the Data center assets and resources tab –> toggle Inventory –>
              toggle Switch Fabrics –> select the customer switch fabric you created –>
              change the view to icon view.

              You should now have a diagram similar to the following:




              Figure 5-3 The switch fabric network details - icon view




110   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
Click the switch. This will show the customer the VLANs in more detail and which
          switch ports are connected to the servers:




          Figure 5-4 Switch network details - icon view

          You can also drill down to a single server view by selecting any of the servers:




          Figure 5-5 Server network details - icon view

          All the resources are listed under the Inventory toggle. Show any resources you
          think the customer may be interested in seeing. They should all be configured to
          the requirements agreed upon when setting up the environment. Remember to
          switch the view back to the details view.


5.2.2 Show the customer the resource pools
          Select the Data center assets and resources tab -> toggle Resource Pools.

          Ensure the correct servers are in each pool. Select one of the pools and show
          the servers. Talk about their current status: If they are brown, they are assigned
          to a cluster and application, if they are green, they are unassigned, and so forth.

          The following diagram shows servers in the Intel Pool. For example, x330-2 and
          x330-7 are assigned to the Sales Web Servers cluster part of the Internet Sales



                                                             Chapter 5. Demonstration    111
application, and x330-4 is assigned to the HR Web Servers cluster part of the
              Human Resources application.




              Figure 5-6 Servers in the pre-POC environment



5.3 Customer applications
              Show the customer the applications that are being provisioned.
              1. Select the Customer applications tab -> toggle Customers -> select the
                 customer name.
                  You now see the names of the applications that you have agreed with the
                  customer should be provisioned.
              2. Select one of these applications -> select the Clusters tab.
                  You now see the names of the clusters that are part of the application and
                  information about the clusters:




112   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
Figure 5-7 Application clusters

3. Select the Servers tab.
   You now see the names of the servers running the application, the clusters
   they belong to, and their utilization:




Figure 5-8 Active servers for an application

4. Select the Properties tab.
   You now see the Application Data where you can set SLA levels for the
   application:




                                                 Chapter 5. Demonstration   113
Figure 5-9 Application service objective details

              5. Select one of the application clusters in the left column and select the Info
                 tab.
                  Here, you can see which servers are provisioned for the application and the
                  operating mode of the cluster. This page also shows you which pool the
                  servers are from or that the servers are dedicated to the cluster:




              Figure 5-10 Active servers in a cluster

              6. Change the Operating Mode to manual.
              7. Type 1 into the Overflow service box, and select Add. (Set the refresh rate
                 to 10 sec.)
                  This manually provisions a server to this application. You will see a new
                  server from the pool appear in the cluster and the utilization of the other
                  servers reduces:




114   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
Figure 5-11 Manually provisioning a server

8. Change the Operating Mode back to automatic before you continue.
9. Select the Deployments tab -> set the Status to all -> select Search.
   This shows you a history of all the successful and failed deployments of
   servers to this cluster:




Figure 5-12 Server Add workflow transitions



                                                  Chapter 5. Demonstration    115
5.4 Real-time performance monitoring
              As long as it has been set up, the simulator changes the utilization of the servers
              and automatically adds and removes servers from the applications. Servers can
              also be added manually or semi-automatically.
              1. For the servers to automatically be added and removed from applications
                 ensure all the applications are set to automatic mode, as follows.
                  Select the Customer applications tab -> toggle the Customer tag -> select
                  the customer name -> select the application -> set the Operating Mode on the
                  pull-down menu to automatic -> select Change.
              2. Now show the overall server utilization and performance as the servers are
                 being added to and removed from applications:
                  Select the Data center assets and resources tab -> toggle Inventory ->
                  select Servers -> on the Servers tab from the top pull-down menus, select All
                  for Cluster and All for Pool -> select Search.

              You should now have a view similar to the following figure:




              Figure 5-13 Servers view - provisioning details

                  This view shows you all the servers in your environment, which
                  application/cluster they are assigned to, and to which pool they belong. Watch
                  the server utilization move up and down on the right side. As the utilization
                  increases for an application, you will see extra servers being assigned, and as
                  demand drops, servers being unassigned.




116   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
3. Hover your curser over the server names.
   This will show you that the servers are in maintenance (red), available
   (green), assigned (gold), or dedicated (silver).
4. Show the semi-automatic mode.
   Select one of the applications from the Assigned to field -> select the
   Clusters tab -> set the Operating Mode to semi-automatic from the
   pull-down menu -> select Change -> select the Deployment tab -> set the
   refresh rate to 10 sec -> from the Status pull-down menu, select Waiting for
   Approval -> select Search.
   The next time a server needs to be added to the application, an execution
   request will show on the management GUI, as shown in the following figure:




Figure 5-14 Approving an operation in semi-automatic mode

If you approve the above request, a server will be removed from the application.

To check if the task you have approved has been executed successfully, from
the Status pull-down menu, select Deployed -> Search.




                                                   Chapter 5. Demonstration   117
118   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
A


  Appendix A.    Additional material
                 This Redpaper refers to additional material that can be downloaded from the
                 Internet as described below.



Locating the Web material
                 The Web material associated with this Redpaper is available in softcopy on the
                 Internet from the IBM Redbooks Web server. Point your Web browser to:
                     ftp://www.redbooks.ibm.com/redbooks/REDP3830

                 Select the Additional materials and open the directory that corresponds with
                 the Redpaper form number, REDP3830.



Using the Web material
                 The additional Web material that accompanies this Redpaper includes the
                 following files:
                 File name                 Description
                 REDP3830.zip              Data center model and workload simulation used during
                                           the project.




© Copyright IBM Corp. 2004. All rights reserved.                                               119
System requirements for downloading the Web material
              The following system configuration is recommended:
              Hard disk space:        1 MB minimum
              Operating System:       Microsoft Windows
              Processor:              any
              Memory:                 any


How to use the Web material
              Create a subdirectory (folder) on your workstation, and unzip the contents of the
              Web material zip file into this folder.




120   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
Related publications

                 The publications listed in this section are considered particularly suitable for a
                 more detailed discussion of the topics covered in this Redpaper.



IBM Redbooks
                 For information on ordering these publications, see “How to get IBM Redbooks”
                 on page 122. Note that some of these documents referenced here may be
                 available in softcopy only.
                     Provisioning On Demand: Introducing IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic
                     Orchestrator, SG24-8888.
                     IBM Web Infrastructure Orchestration, SG24-7003
                     Implementing Systems Management Solutions using IBM Director,
                     SG24-6188
                     WebSphere Edge Server New Features and Functions in Version 2,
                     SG24-6511
                     Unattended Pristine Installation with IBM Tivoli Configuration Manager,
                     SG24-6627
                     IBM WebSphere V5.0 for Linux, Implementation and Deployment Guide:
                     WebSphere Handbook Series, REDP-3601
                     IBM WebSphere V5.0 Performance, Scalability, and High Availability:
                     WebSphere Handbook Series, SG24-6198



Product manuals
                 These publications are also relevant as further information sources:
                     IBM Tivoli Intelligent Orchestrator and Tivoli Provisioning Manager Release
                     Notes, SC32-1422
                     IBM Tivoli Intelligent Orchestrator and Tivoli Provisioning Manager Operator’s
                     Guide, SC32-1421
                     IBM Tivoli Intelligent Orchestrator and Tivoli Provisioning Manager Installation
                     Guide, SC32-1420




© Copyright IBM Corp. 2004. All rights reserved.                                                  121
IBM Tivoli Provisioning Manager and Intelligent Orchestrator Overview Guide,
                 SC32-1419



Online resources
              These Web sites and URLs are also relevant as further information sources:
                 IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator Product Web page
                 http://www.ibm.com/software/tivoli/products/intell-orch/
                 IBM Tivoli Provisioning Manager Product Web page
                 http://www.ibm.com/software/tivoli/products/prov-mgr/
                 Cwgwin
                 http://www.cygwin.com/
                 WebSphere Application Server manuals
                 http://www.ibm.com/software/webservers/appserv/was/library/
                 IBM DB2 manuals
                 http://www.ibm.com/software/data/db2/library/
                 Software Support
                 http://www.ibm.com/software/support
                 IBM Web infrastructure orchestration
                 http://www.ibm.com/software/tivoli/features/web-svr-prov/solution.ht
                 ml
                 IBM Application Framework for e-business
                 http://www.research.ibm.com/journal/sj/401/flurry.html



How to get IBM Redbooks
              You can search for, view, or download Redbooks, Redpapers, Hints and Tips,
              draft publications and Additional materials, as well as order hardcopy Redbooks
              or CD-ROMs, at this Web site:
                 ibm.com/redbooks




122   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
Help from IBM
        IBM Support and downloads:
           ibm.com/support

        IBM Global Services:
           ibm.com/services




                                     Related publications   123
124   Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
Ibm tivoli intelligent think dynamic orchestrator pre proof of-concept cookbook for business partners redp3830
Back cover                                       ®



IBM Tivoli Intelligent
ThinkDynamic Orchestrator
Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
                                                                                   Redpaper

Installation and      This IBM Redpaper provides advice for Business
customization
                                                                                INTERNATIONAL
                      Partners about how to plan for, implement, and
                      demonstrate IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic
                                                                                TECHNICAL
Data center           Orchestrator Version 1.1.0 and IBM Tivoli Provisioning
                                                                                SUPPORT
modeling              Manager Version 1.1.0 in a pre-proof-of-concept           ORGANIZATION
                      simulated environment.
Workload simulation
                      This environment can be used to demonstrate the           BUILDING TECHNICAL
                      capabilities of the IBM Tivoli orchestration and          INFORMATION BASED ON
                      provisioning solutions using customer data, in order to   PRACTICAL EXPERIENCE
                      gain customer acceptance for the next phase of the sell
                      cycle — to engage the Business Partner in a real          IBM Redbooks are developed by
                      proof-of-concept of IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic   the IBM International Technical
                      Orchestrator or IBM Tivoli Intelligent Provisioning       Support Organization. Experts
                                                                                from IBM, Customers and
                      Manager.                                                  Partners from around the world
                                                                                create timely technical
                                                                                information based on realistic
                                                                                scenarios. Specific
                                                                                recommendations are provided
                                                                                to help you implement IT
                                                                                solutions more effectively in
                                                                                your environment.



                                                                                For more information:
                                                                                ibm.com/redbooks

                        REDP-3830-00

More Related Content

PDF
Tape automation with ibm e server xseries servers redp0415
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli composite application manager for web reso...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Tivoli data warehouse version 1.3 planning and implementation sg246343
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Tec implementation examples sg245216
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Tivoli business systems manager v2.1 end to-end business impact management sg...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Tivoli storage productivity center v4.2 release guide sg247894
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Tivoli data warehouse 1.2 and business objects redp9116
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Certification guide series ibm tivoli provisioning manager express for softwa...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Tape automation with ibm e server xseries servers redp0415
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli composite application manager for web reso...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Tivoli data warehouse version 1.3 planning and implementation sg246343
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Tec implementation examples sg245216
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Tivoli business systems manager v2.1 end to-end business impact management sg...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Tivoli storage productivity center v4.2 release guide sg247894
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Tivoli data warehouse 1.2 and business objects redp9116
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Certification guide series ibm tivoli provisioning manager express for softwa...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 

What's hot (19)

PDF
IBMRedbook
Neelamegan Minor
 
PDF
Integrating tivoli products sg247757
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Introducing ibm tivoli license manager sg246888
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Certification guide series ibm tivoli provisioning manager v5.1 sg247262
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Ibm virtualization engine ts7500 planning, implementation, and usage guide sg...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Db2 udb backup and recovery with ess copy services
bupbechanhgmail
 
PDF
Sg247137
gangaramdalvi
 
PDF
Deployment guide series ibm total storage productivity center for data sg247140
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Solution deployment guide for ibm tivoli composite application manager for we...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Deployment guide series maximo asset mng 7 1
Slađan Šehović
 
PDF
Sg247692 Websphere Accounting Chargeback For Tuam Guide
brzaaap
 
PDF
A practical guide to tivoli sa nergy sg246146
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Ibm tivoli usage accounting manager v7.1 handbook sg247404
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
BOOK - IBM Implementing ibm system directory 6.1
Satya Harish
 
PDF
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli provisioning manager express v4.1 for soft...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Ibm tivoli monitoring version 5.1.1 creating resource models and providers sg...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Ibm midrange system storage implementation and best practices guide sg246363
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Sg248107 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700
Wellington Torrejais da Silva
 
PDF
Implementing the ibm storwize v3700
Diego Alberto Tamayo
 
IBMRedbook
Neelamegan Minor
 
Integrating tivoli products sg247757
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Introducing ibm tivoli license manager sg246888
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Certification guide series ibm tivoli provisioning manager v5.1 sg247262
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Ibm virtualization engine ts7500 planning, implementation, and usage guide sg...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Db2 udb backup and recovery with ess copy services
bupbechanhgmail
 
Sg247137
gangaramdalvi
 
Deployment guide series ibm total storage productivity center for data sg247140
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Solution deployment guide for ibm tivoli composite application manager for we...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Deployment guide series maximo asset mng 7 1
Slađan Šehović
 
Sg247692 Websphere Accounting Chargeback For Tuam Guide
brzaaap
 
A practical guide to tivoli sa nergy sg246146
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Ibm tivoli usage accounting manager v7.1 handbook sg247404
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
BOOK - IBM Implementing ibm system directory 6.1
Satya Harish
 
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli provisioning manager express v4.1 for soft...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Ibm tivoli monitoring version 5.1.1 creating resource models and providers sg...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Ibm midrange system storage implementation and best practices guide sg246363
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Sg248107 Implementing the IBM Storwize V3700
Wellington Torrejais da Silva
 
Implementing the ibm storwize v3700
Diego Alberto Tamayo
 
Ad

Similar to Ibm tivoli intelligent think dynamic orchestrator pre proof of-concept cookbook for business partners redp3830 (20)

PDF
IBM PowerVM Best Practices
IBM India Smarter Computing
 
PDF
IBM Streams - Redbook
Pesta Ria Henny Beatrice
 
PDF
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli composite application manager for web reso...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Certification guide series ibm tivoli workload scheduler v8.4 sg247628
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Mysql To Db2 Conversion Guide Ibm Redbooks
iliqzrccg
 
PDF
Certification guide series ibm tivoli netcool omn ibus v7.2 implementation sg...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Certification guide series ibm tivoli usage and accounting manager v7.1 imple...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli usage and accounting manager v7.1 sg247569
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli provisioning manager express v4.1 for soft...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Ibm Informix Integration Through Data Federation Ibm Redbooks
zlimagabca
 
PDF
Introducing tivoli personalized services manager 1.1 sg246031
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Certification guide series ibm tivoli netcool webtop v2.0 implementationsg247754
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Certification guide series ibm tivoli netcool impact v4.0 implementation sg24...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
BOOK - IBM zOS V1R10 communications server TCP / IP implementation volume 1 b...
Satya Harish
 
PDF
Certification study guide for ibm tivoli configuration manager 4.2 redp3946
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Ibm tivoli web access for information management sg246823
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Implementing ibm tivoli workload scheduler v 8.2 extended agent for ibm tivol...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
BOOK - IBM tivoli netcool service quality manager data mediation gateway deve...
Satya Harish
 
PDF
IBM PowerVC Introduction and Configuration
IBM India Smarter Computing
 
PDF
Ref arch for ve sg248155
Accenture
 
IBM PowerVM Best Practices
IBM India Smarter Computing
 
IBM Streams - Redbook
Pesta Ria Henny Beatrice
 
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli composite application manager for web reso...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Certification guide series ibm tivoli workload scheduler v8.4 sg247628
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Mysql To Db2 Conversion Guide Ibm Redbooks
iliqzrccg
 
Certification guide series ibm tivoli netcool omn ibus v7.2 implementation sg...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Certification guide series ibm tivoli usage and accounting manager v7.1 imple...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli usage and accounting manager v7.1 sg247569
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli provisioning manager express v4.1 for soft...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Ibm Informix Integration Through Data Federation Ibm Redbooks
zlimagabca
 
Introducing tivoli personalized services manager 1.1 sg246031
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Certification guide series ibm tivoli netcool webtop v2.0 implementationsg247754
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Certification guide series ibm tivoli netcool impact v4.0 implementation sg24...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
BOOK - IBM zOS V1R10 communications server TCP / IP implementation volume 1 b...
Satya Harish
 
Certification study guide for ibm tivoli configuration manager 4.2 redp3946
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Ibm tivoli web access for information management sg246823
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Implementing ibm tivoli workload scheduler v 8.2 extended agent for ibm tivol...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
BOOK - IBM tivoli netcool service quality manager data mediation gateway deve...
Satya Harish
 
IBM PowerVC Introduction and Configuration
IBM India Smarter Computing
 
Ref arch for ve sg248155
Accenture
 
Ad

More from Banking at Ho Chi Minh city (20)

PDF
Postgresql v15.1
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Postgresql v14.6 Document Guide
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 Pot Intro v0.1
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7 Tech Overview
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
IBM MobileFirst Foundation Version Flyer v1.0
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 POT Offers Lab v1.0
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 pot intro v0.1
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 POT App Mgmt Lab v1.1
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 POT Analytics v1.1
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
IBM MobileFirst Platform Pot Sentiment Analysis v3
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
IBM MobileFirst Platform 7.0 POT InApp Feedback V0.1
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Tme 10 cookbook for aix systems management and networking sg244867
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Tivoli firewall magic redp0227
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Tivoli data warehouse version 1.3 planning and implementation sg246343
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Synchronizing data with ibm tivoli directory integrator 6.1 redp4317
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Storage migration and consolidation with ibm total storage products redp3888
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Slr to tivoli performance reporter for os 390 migration cookbook sg245128
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Setup and configuration for ibm tivoli access manager for enterprise single s...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Windows nt backup and recovery with adsm sg242231
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
PDF
Tivoli management services warehouse and reporting sg247290
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Postgresql v15.1
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Postgresql v14.6 Document Guide
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 Pot Intro v0.1
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7 Tech Overview
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
IBM MobileFirst Foundation Version Flyer v1.0
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 POT Offers Lab v1.0
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 pot intro v0.1
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 POT App Mgmt Lab v1.1
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
IBM MobileFirst Platform v7.0 POT Analytics v1.1
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
IBM MobileFirst Platform Pot Sentiment Analysis v3
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
IBM MobileFirst Platform 7.0 POT InApp Feedback V0.1
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Tme 10 cookbook for aix systems management and networking sg244867
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Tivoli firewall magic redp0227
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Tivoli data warehouse version 1.3 planning and implementation sg246343
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Synchronizing data with ibm tivoli directory integrator 6.1 redp4317
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Storage migration and consolidation with ibm total storage products redp3888
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Slr to tivoli performance reporter for os 390 migration cookbook sg245128
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Setup and configuration for ibm tivoli access manager for enterprise single s...
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Windows nt backup and recovery with adsm sg242231
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 
Tivoli management services warehouse and reporting sg247290
Banking at Ho Chi Minh city
 

Recently uploaded (20)

PDF
Revolutionize Operations with Intelligent IoT Monitoring and Control
Rejig Digital
 
PDF
BLW VOCATIONAL TRAINING SUMMER INTERNSHIP REPORT
codernjn73
 
PDF
Security features in Dell, HP, and Lenovo PC systems: A research-based compar...
Principled Technologies
 
PDF
SparkLabs Primer on Artificial Intelligence 2025
SparkLabs Group
 
PPTX
The-Ethical-Hackers-Imperative-Safeguarding-the-Digital-Frontier.pptx
sujalchauhan1305
 
PDF
Google’s NotebookLM Unveils Video Overviews
SOFTTECHHUB
 
PPT
L2 Rules of Netiquette in Empowerment technology
Archibal2
 
PDF
Accelerating Oracle Database 23ai Troubleshooting with Oracle AHF Fleet Insig...
Sandesh Rao
 
PDF
The Evolution of KM Roles (Presented at Knowledge Summit Dublin 2025)
Enterprise Knowledge
 
PDF
CIFDAQ's Teaching Thursday: Moving Averages Made Simple
CIFDAQ
 
PDF
Advances in Ultra High Voltage (UHV) Transmission and Distribution Systems.pdf
Nabajyoti Banik
 
PDF
Oracle AI Vector Search- Getting Started and what's new in 2025- AIOUG Yatra ...
Sandesh Rao
 
PPTX
AI and Robotics for Human Well-being.pptx
JAYMIN SUTHAR
 
PDF
Automating ArcGIS Content Discovery with FME: A Real World Use Case
Safe Software
 
PDF
CIFDAQ's Token Spotlight: SKY - A Forgotten Giant's Comeback?
CIFDAQ
 
PDF
DevOps & Developer Experience Summer BBQ
AUGNYC
 
PDF
REPORT: Heating appliances market in Poland 2024
SPIUG
 
PDF
Software Development Company | KodekX
KodekX
 
PDF
Orbitly Pitch Deck|A Mission-Driven Platform for Side Project Collaboration (...
zz41354899
 
PDF
AI Unleashed - Shaping the Future -Starting Today - AIOUG Yatra 2025 - For Co...
Sandesh Rao
 
Revolutionize Operations with Intelligent IoT Monitoring and Control
Rejig Digital
 
BLW VOCATIONAL TRAINING SUMMER INTERNSHIP REPORT
codernjn73
 
Security features in Dell, HP, and Lenovo PC systems: A research-based compar...
Principled Technologies
 
SparkLabs Primer on Artificial Intelligence 2025
SparkLabs Group
 
The-Ethical-Hackers-Imperative-Safeguarding-the-Digital-Frontier.pptx
sujalchauhan1305
 
Google’s NotebookLM Unveils Video Overviews
SOFTTECHHUB
 
L2 Rules of Netiquette in Empowerment technology
Archibal2
 
Accelerating Oracle Database 23ai Troubleshooting with Oracle AHF Fleet Insig...
Sandesh Rao
 
The Evolution of KM Roles (Presented at Knowledge Summit Dublin 2025)
Enterprise Knowledge
 
CIFDAQ's Teaching Thursday: Moving Averages Made Simple
CIFDAQ
 
Advances in Ultra High Voltage (UHV) Transmission and Distribution Systems.pdf
Nabajyoti Banik
 
Oracle AI Vector Search- Getting Started and what's new in 2025- AIOUG Yatra ...
Sandesh Rao
 
AI and Robotics for Human Well-being.pptx
JAYMIN SUTHAR
 
Automating ArcGIS Content Discovery with FME: A Real World Use Case
Safe Software
 
CIFDAQ's Token Spotlight: SKY - A Forgotten Giant's Comeback?
CIFDAQ
 
DevOps & Developer Experience Summer BBQ
AUGNYC
 
REPORT: Heating appliances market in Poland 2024
SPIUG
 
Software Development Company | KodekX
KodekX
 
Orbitly Pitch Deck|A Mission-Driven Platform for Side Project Collaboration (...
zz41354899
 
AI Unleashed - Shaping the Future -Starting Today - AIOUG Yatra 2025 - For Co...
Sandesh Rao
 

Ibm tivoli intelligent think dynamic orchestrator pre proof of-concept cookbook for business partners redp3830

  • 1. Front cover IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners Installation and customization Data center modeling Workload simulation Edson Manoel Tony French ibm.com/redbooks Redpaper
  • 3. International Technical Support Organization IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners February 2004
  • 4. Note: Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in “Notices” on page vii. First Edition (February 2004) This edition applies to IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator Version 1.1.0 and IBM Tivoli Provisioning Manager Version 1.1.0. © Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2004. All rights reserved. Note to U.S. Government Users Restricted Rights -- Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
  • 5. Contents Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix Recommended reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x The team that wrote this Redpaper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x Become a published author . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi Comments welcome. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi Chapter 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 2. Planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2.1 Interviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 2.2 General questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 2.3 ITITO components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 2.3.1 Power units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 2.3.2 Network configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 2.3.3 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 2.3.4 Spare pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 2.3.5 Applications and customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 2.3.6 Other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 2.3.7 Scoping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 3.1 Installation process overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 3.1.1 Recommended installation directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 3.1.2 User IDs and passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 3.2 Installing and configuring TIOdbsrv - Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 3.2.1 Creating the required user IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 3.2.2 Installing and configuring Cygwin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 3.2.3 Configuring SSH communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 3.2.4 Installing and configuring IBM DB2 UDB V8.1.2 on Windows . . . . . 34 3.2.5 Installing and configuring IBM Directory Server V5.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 3.3 Installing and configuring TIOsrv - Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 3.3.1 Creating the required user IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 3.3.2 Installing and configuring Cygwin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 3.3.3 Configuring SSH communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 3.3.4 Installing IBM DB2 Universal Database V8.1.2 Client. . . . . . . . . . . . 48 3.3.5 Installing and configuring IBM Directory V5.1 Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 © Copyright IBM Corp. 2004. All rights reserved. iii
  • 6. 3.3.6 Installing IBM WebSphere Application Server Base V5.0. . . . . . . . . 52 3.3.7 Install the IBM WebSphere fixpack 1 and required fixes. . . . . . . . . . 55 3.3.8 Installing IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator . . . . . . . 67 Chapter 4. Creating the demonstration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 4.1 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 4.1.1 WordPad or Notepad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 4.1.2 Cooktop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 4.1.3 XMLSpy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 4.2 Designing the data center model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 4.2.1 ITITO GUI method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 4.2.2 The XML method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 4.2.3 DOCTYPE element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 4.2.4 Power supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 4.2.5 Network components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 4.2.6 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 4.2.7 Spare pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 4.2.8 ITITO configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 4.2.9 Customers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 4.3 Sample XML files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 4.3.1 Cookbook example DCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 4.3.2 Redbook example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 4.4 Loading the data center model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 4.4.1 Tip for creating XML files using text editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 4.5 Configuring the simulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 4.5.1 Data center model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 4.5.2 The tdnetworks file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 4.6 Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Chapter 5. Demonstration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 5.1 Introduction to ITITO and the scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 5.1.1 ITITO: A quick overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 5.2 Data center assets and resources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 5.2.1 Show the switch fabric and inventory resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 5.2.2 Show the customer the resource pools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 5.3 Customer applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 5.4 Real-time performance monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Appendix A. Additional material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Locating the Web material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Using the Web material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 System requirements for downloading the Web material . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 How to use the Web material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 iv Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 7. Related publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 IBM Redbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Product manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Online resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 How to get IBM Redbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Help from IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Contents v
  • 8. vi Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 9. Notices This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A. IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in other countries. Consult your local IBM representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is the user's responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service. IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to: IBM Director of Licensing, IBM Corporation, North Castle Drive Armonk, NY 10504-1785 U.S.A. The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you. This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any time without notice. Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this IBM product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk. IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. Information concerning non-IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of those products, their published announcements or other publicly available sources. IBM has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy of performance, compatibility or any other claims related to non-IBM products. Questions on the capabilities of non-IBM products should be addressed to the suppliers of those products. This information contains examples of data and reports used in daily business operations. To illustrate them as completely as possible, the examples include the names of individuals, companies, brands, and products. All of these names are fictitious and any similarity to the names and addresses used by an actual business enterprise is entirely coincidental. COPYRIGHT LICENSE: This information contains sample application programs in source language, which illustrates programming techniques on various operating platforms. You may copy, modify, and distribute these sample programs in any form without payment to IBM, for the purposes of developing, using, marketing or distributing application programs conforming to the application programming interface for the operating platform for which the sample programs are written. These examples have not been thoroughly tested under all conditions. IBM, therefore, cannot guarantee or imply reliability, serviceability, or function of these programs. You may copy, modify, and distribute these sample programs in any form without payment to IBM for the purposes of developing, using, marketing, or distributing application programs conforming to IBM's application programming interfaces. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2004. All rights reserved. vii
  • 10. Trademarks The following terms are trademarks of the International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both: AIX® ibm.com® RS/6000® DB2 Universal Database™ OS/390® Tivoli® DB2® Redbooks™ WebSphere® IBM® Redbooks (logo) ™ z/OS® The following terms are trademarks of other companies: Intel, Intel Inside (logos), and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Microsoft, Windows, and the Windows logo are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States, other countries, or both. Other company, product, and service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. viii Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 11. Preface IBM® has changed the provisioning paradigm from “just-in-case” to “just-in-time” on demand provisioning with IBM Tivoli® Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator (ITITO) and IBM Tivoli Provisioning Manager, for managing resource information and enhancing automation. IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator and IBM Tivoli Provisioning Manager automate the traditional manual provisioning process, performance measurement, capacity planning, and infrastructure deployment. IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator operates in a closed loop that performs automatic resource requirements prediction, based on predefined service level objectives and agreements, and automates infrastructure deployment. This just-in-time cycle ensures that each application has the resource it needs, when it needs it — without static over provisioning. The primary objective of this IBM Redpaper is to provide step-by-step instructions about how to set up a stand-alone IBM Tivoli provisioning solution environment to be used for demonstrating the functions and features of the products, using customer data and mapping customer infrastructure and workloads. General knowledge is assumed of communication network architecture and design, network security architecture and design, data center environment infrastructure and operations, Java™ and XML coding, database and Web application servers. This document is intended to be read and used by pre-sales systems engineers and services personnel to build customized demonstrations of the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator. A significant amount of knowledge of ITITO is expected, and the reader should ideally have attended the ITITO basic and advanced training classes. The reader should be familiar with the following topics: XML and XML concepts Network topologies Switch, router, firewall, and load balancer configuration Software packaging Distributed systems architectures and configuration This Redpaper is a valuable addition to and can be read in conjunction with the existing product documentation. See the following recommended reading. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2004. All rights reserved. ix
  • 12. Recommended reading The publications listed in this section are considered particularly suitable for a more detailed discussion of the topics covered in this Redpaper. Product manuals: IBM Tivoli Intelligent Orchestrator and Tivoli Provisioning Manager Release Notes, SC32-1422 IBM Tivoli Intelligent Orchestrator and Tivoli Provisioning Manager Operator’s Guide, SC32-1421 IBM Tivoli Intelligent Orchestrator and Tivoli Provisioning Manager Installation Guide, SC32-1420 IBM Tivoli Provisioning Manager and Intelligent Orchestrator Overview Guide, SC32-1419 Online resources: IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator Product Web page: http://www.ibm.com/software/tivoli/products/intell-orch/ IBM Tivoli Provisioning Manager Product Web page: http://www.ibm.com/software/tivoli/products/prov-mgr/ IBM Redbooks™: Provisioning On Demand: Introducing IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator, SG24-8888 http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/redbooks/pdfs/sg248888.pdf IBM Web Infrastructure Orchestration, SG24-7003 http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/redbooks/pdfs/sg247003.pdf The team that wrote this Redpaper This Redpaper was produced by a team of specialists from around the world working at the International Technical Support Organization, Austin Center. Edson Manoel is a Software Engineer at IBM Corporation, International Technical Support Organization, Austin Center, working as an IT Specialist in the Systems Management area. Prior to joining the ITSO, Edson worked in the IBM Software Group as a Tivoli Technology Ambassador and within IBM Brazil Professional Services Organization as a Certified IT Specialist. He was involved in numerous projects, such as designing and implementing systems x Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 13. management solutions for IBM customers and Business Partners. Edson holds a bachelor’s degree in Applied Mathematics from Universidade de Sao Paulo, Brazil. Tony French is a Tivoli Services Consultant in the U.K. He has 21 years of experience in the IT industry, including six years experience in Tivoli Software. His areas of expertise include IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator, IBM Tivoli Business Systems Manager, and the Tivoli Framework suite of products. He has written extensively about IBM Tivoli Business Systems Manager. Thanks to the following people for their contributions to this project: Morten Moeller ITSO Austin Center Sara C. Brumfield ITITO Level 2 Support, IBM Software Group Theo Winkelmann On Demand Sales Enablement, IBM Software Group Leonard Hand Senior Consulting I/T Architect, IBM Global eBusiness Solution Center Become a published author Join us for a two- to six-week residency program! Help write an IBM Redbook dealing with specific products or solutions, while getting hands-on experience with leading-edge technologies. You'll team with IBM technical professionals, Business Partners and/or customers. Your efforts will help increase product acceptance and customer satisfaction. As a bonus, you'll develop a network of contacts in IBM development labs, and increase your productivity and marketability. Find out more about the residency program, browse the residency index, and apply online at: ibm.com/redbooks/residencies.html Comments welcome Your comments are important to us! We want our papers to be as helpful as possible. Send us your comments about this Redpaper or other Redbooks in one of the following ways: Use the online Contact us review redbook form found at: ibm.com/redbooks Preface xi
  • 14. Send your comments in an Internet note to: [email protected] Mail your comments to: IBM Corporation, International Technical Support Organization Dept. JN9B Building 003 Internal Zip 2834 11400 Burnet Road Austin, Texas 78758-3493 xii Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 15. 1 Chapter 1. Introduction This document describes a method to build a customized demonstration of IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator (ITITO) for any customer. It is expected that such a task can be achieved over a period of three working days, consisting of the following major activities: Planning Interviewing the customer and the customer’s technical specialists to determine which of the customer’s applications are suitable to be automated with ITITO and the nature and extent of the components that make up these applications. Negotiating with the customer to remove components that are either not necessary to demonstrate the product or would be too time-consuming to build. Data center modeling Some discussion of the software tools that might be useful. Installation instructions for installing the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator management servers on Microsoft® Windows® Server 2000. Using the information gathered in the interviews to create a data center model definition in XML format for loading into ITITO. Some examples of data center elements that can be used as templates. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2004. All rights reserved. 1
  • 16. Guidance on configuring the ITITO simulator for the customized data center model. Demonstration Guidelines demonstrating the key features of the ITITO product. Provisioning and orchestrating, including: – Data center assets and resources – Customer applications – Real-time performance monitoring 2 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 17. 2 Chapter 2. Planning In this chapter, we discuss the planning required to build a customized demonstration of ITITO. Planning typically involves interviewing the customer to obtain a fairly detailed audit of the environment that they would like to automate with ITITO. Obviously, the customer’s expectations and requirements are often significantly greater than can be achieved in the time frame usually permitted to build a demonstration, so the planning process should involve negotiations to reveal elements of the customer’s requirements. This chapter contains some guidelines to help in this area. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2004. All rights reserved. 3
  • 18. 2.1 Interviews To demonstrate to a customer how ITITO can be used in their environments, it is necessary to conduct a number of interviews with various specialists. Building an ITITO data center model can require a detailed level of information including, for example, MAC addresses and information about which ports on the network switch to which each network interface card (NIC) connects. For the purposes of a demonstration, however, it is not strictly necessary to gather the finest detail, but it may be advisable so that any subsequent Proof of Concepts (POC) project has a head start. The initial interviews should determine if the customer has any applications that are suitable for automating with ITITO and selecting a number that can be used to build the demonstration system. We recommend that at least two applications, but no more than four, be selected to build the demonstration. 2.2 General questions During the initial interview with the customer, these questions may be useful to gain an overview of the customer’s environment and operating practices: 1. Does the customer have any applications that use clusters of similar servers to provide a service? Tip: If the customer has mainly mainframe-based computing and is not planning to change to a distributed architecture, they are not an ideal candidate. ITITO fits very well for applications that support horizontal scaling (that is, Web, application servers). 2. Do the servers in these clusters run single applications or many? Tip: If the customer runs more than one application in each server, this application might not be suitable for automation by ITITO. 3. Typically, how many servers make up these clusters? 4. Do these clusters of servers use load balancers or application servers to control the utilization of each server? 5. Does the customer provide sufficient servers to meet peak loads? What is the average utilization of the servers in these application clusters? 6. How does the customer plan for peak loads (for example, year-end accounting, special promotions, or sales)? Does the customer: 4 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 19. – Wait for the load to materialize and then take action as above? – Build extra servers for each application and incorporate these into the clusters? – Do nothing? (Longer response times at peak times are normal!) 7. How does the customer handle peak loads in their applications? Does the customer: – Have a number of extra servers dedicated to each application? – Reconfigure other application servers? – Have a spare pool of servers that can be built to order? 8. When the peak loads subside, does the customer: – Return any servers that were added to the application cluster to their previous state? – Leave the servers in place for the next peak? 9. If the customer returns servers to their previous state, how long does this typically take? 10.Do the customer’s applications have peak loads at different times? 11.Could the customer conceivably use servers that are idle for one application in another application that is undergoing a peak load? 12.Does the customer maintain a large number of dedicated test servers for each application, or does the customer use a general pool of test servers? Tip: The more the better: ITITO provides a great starting point in a non-production environment and allows the customer to recover, redeploy, or eliminate redundant servers in the test environment. 13.Typically, what is the utilization of the test server environments? 14.Are the applications written in-house or are they 100% “shrink-wrapped” from the software vendor (that is, no customization)? Does the customer perform their own development and testing? Tip: ITITO can enhance the management and maintenance of customized or homegrown applications. If the customer has a 100% shrink-wrapped environment and rarely makes changes to their production/staging environments, they are less qualified as a prospective customer. 15.Does the customer operate applications over multiple data centers? 16.Does the customer have control over their network environment, or is it outsourced to a network provider? Chapter 2. Planning 5
  • 20. Tip: If the customer’s network is totally outsourced, they might not have sufficient access to perform the dynamic reconfiguration that ITITO is capable of providing. 17.What are the customer’s predominant operating systems (for example, AIX®, Solaris, HP/UX, Microsoft Windows, or Linux)? Tip: If the customer uses mainly OS/390® or non UNIX®/Intel® operating systems, they might be less qualified as a prospect. 18.Does the customer have any blade servers? If so which types/makes (HP, IBM, and so on)? 19.How many and what type of network switches is the customer using (that is, Cisco, Extreme, Foundry, and so on)? Tip: Our application is better suited for Level 3 (network layer) switches, but we can also work with Level 2 (data layer) switches. 20.What level of redundancy is provided for at the network equipment level, if any? 21.What type of network and systems management software is the customer using (OpenView, Tivoli, CA UniCenter, and so on)? Tip: Helps determine the level of sophistication present in the network operations center. 22.What kind of storage infrastructure is in place (that is, Storage Area Network, or SAN, Network Attached Storage, Redundant Array of Independent Disks, or RAID)? 23.What are the customer’s dominant relational database management systems (Oracle, DB2®, Microsoft SQL Server, MySQL, or other)? And, are clustered database solutions being used? 24.What is the application server software, if any (WebSphere®, Weblogic, Resin, Jboss, or other)? The ideal outcome of these questions is to locate two to four applications that have the following characteristics: Clustered architecture 6 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 21. A low average utilization with idle servers available for peak demand Or, A pool of spare servers that are provisioned for peak demand Use similar hardware and operating system platforms Operate in a network that the customer has control over Alternatively, if the customer wants to provision application test environments from a pool of common servers rather than maintain separate test environments for each application, ITITO can be a suitable tool for this, too. The following table can be used to collect and summarize the data from these questions: Table 2-1 Capturing customer planning information skeleton Applic- # Operating # # Avg. # ation Servers systems Web Data- util Spare servers bases % servers 2.3 ITITO components After a limited number of suitable applications are identified, it is necessary to gather additional technical details in order to build an ITITO data center model. To simplify the data center model building, these components have been broken down into the following categories: Power units Network configuration Software configuration Spare pools Customers, applications, and clusters Other devices The following sections contain tables showing the required attributes that need to be collected for each component type. The shaded cells in these tables are for additional data that is not essential for a demonstration but is necessary for a full ITITO build or Proof of Concept. Chapter 2. Planning 7
  • 22. 2.3.1 Power units For the purposes of a demonstration, power units are optional in ITITO. It is possible to define the power units and to associate devices with these power units. It is also possible to manage the power units through an IP connection. For a demonstration, it will usually only be necessary to collect the names of the units for later reference by other devices: Table 2-2 Power units data collection skeleton Power unit name Manufacturer Model Device model Note: The only devices that are supported by Version 1.1 of ITITO are as follows: Table 2-3 Power units data collection example Manufacturer Model Device model APC 7901 APC-7901-SNMP APC 9606 APC-9606-SNMP Note: It is also possible to define network interface cards (NICs) on a power unit and associate it with a port on a network switch, but it was found that the data center model would not load if this were done. However, it is possible to define the interface from the ITITO GUI. 2.3.2 Network configuration The ITITO network configuration consists of the following main components: Switch fabric Subnetworks Switches Load balancers Virtual IPs Access control lists (ACLs) Each of the main components is addressed separately. Most devices in ITITO require a number of service access points that define the mechanisms and authentication information (user IDs and passwords) that are used to communicate with the device. For a demonstration, these are not 8 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 23. required. However, if the customer is willing to provide this information, and if the demonstration is likely to lead to a Proof of Concept or implementation, the information can be collected in advance. This is addressed in the last segment of this section. Switch fabric The switch fabric is an ITITO concept. For most customers, it will normally only be necessary to define one switch fabric. All that is needed is the name of the fabric. The customers name is recommended to be included here. This name will be used in a number of other components later. Table 2-4 Switch fabric data collection skeleton Switch fabric name Subnetworks Every subnet in use by the applications defined in Section 2.2 on page 4 must be defined to ITITO. In addition, the VLAN that is associated with the subnet must be recorded. Table 2-5 Subnet data collection skeleton Subnet address Netmask VLAN It is possible to define a name for each subnetwork, but we recommend that this not be specified so that the name defaults to the subnet address, because this is easier to understand while using the GUI. When ITITO is used to provision servers, it can assign an IP address to a new server from the next available within a subnet. In this way, ITITO acts in a similar way as a DHCP server, although technically, it assigns a permanent address. For subnets where ITITO is permitted to assign addresses, it will usually be necessary to block certain addresses. Otherwise, ITITO will assign a duplicate address. In particular, each subnet will have a gateway address that should be blocked, and any permanent servers on the subnet should also be blocked. A number of ranges can be defined if necessary. Chapter 2. Planning 9
  • 24. Subnet address Blocked range start Blocked range end Switches Each network switch device that is used by the applications determined in Section 2.2 on page 4 should be recorded here: Table 2-6 Switch data collection skeleton Switch IP Switch Manufacturer Model Device model name address fabric Switches often have separate modules containing a number of ports. Every port that connects a device in the ITITO environment must be defined here and will be used later in the device definitions. It is not necessary to define every port on every switch, just the ones to be controlled by ITITO. Table 2-7 Switch port data collection skeleton Switch name Switch modules Switch port VLAN Port type The valid types of ports for ITITO Version 1.1 are: Ethernet Fast Ethernet Gigabyte 10 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 25. VLAN Unknown It is not essential to define the port types, because this does not affect the demonstration, although the ports will show up as unknown type in the GUI. If any switch is connected to any of the power units identified in 2.3.1, “Power units” on page 8, the attached power unit should be recorded here: Table 2-8 Switch/power units data collection Switch name Power unit Power outlet The following switches are supported by ITITO Version 1.1: Table 2-9 Switch data collection example Manufacturer Model Device model Cisco 6500 Cisco 6500 Switches Hybrid Mode Cisco 6500 Cisco 6500 Switches Native IOS Mode Cisco 3548 Cisco 3548 Cisco 2621 Cisco 2621 IBM Blade Center Blade Center 4p GB Eth 4port GB Extreme 48i Extreme 48i Foundry Foundry Switch Foundry Switch Others Dummy Switch Dummy Switch If the customer has other switches than these, it will be necessary to code custom device drivers during any Proof of Concept or implementation. Fortunately, for a demonstration, it is only necessary to use the dummy switch device model for all devices. This allows the switch operations to be simulated during the demonstration. Routers and firewalls Routers are defined as switches in ITITO, but they also require network interfaces, route definitions, and access control lists. Chapter 2. Planning 11
  • 26. The basic definition table for a router is as follows: Table 2-10 Router data collection skeleton Router Switch Device Manufacturer Model IP address Firewall name fabric model Routers will usually have a number of interfaces that control the routing between subnets. The data required for these components is as follows: Table 2-11 Router interface data collection skeleton Router name Interface name IP address Managed Each interface can support a number of routes, which need to be specified in the following table: Table 2-12 Router interface route data collection skeleton Router name Interface name Route Gateway ACL The following router is a valid device in ITITO Version 1.1: Table 2-13 Router information data collection example Manufacturer Model Device model Cisco 2621 Cisco 2621 Access control lists For each router or firewall that controls traffic between subnetworks, an access control list (ACL) should be defined. These appear on the GUI as a distinctive icon that connects subnetworks. Each ACL can have multiple rules that are unidirectional. Usually at least two rules will be defined, permitting traffic in both directions between a pair of subnets. 12 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 27. Table 2-14 Access Control List data collection skeleton ACL name Rule # Target Source subnet Destination subnet The Target column contains the operational mode of the rule: either permit or deny. Each rule can specify protocols or port ranges to permit or deny, but for the purposes of a demonstration, this should not be necessary. Load balancers Load balancers require the following information to enable them to be defined to ITITO: Table 2-15 Load balancer data collection sample Name Manufacturer Model Type Device model The following load balancers are valid devices in ITITO Version 1.1: Table 2-16 Load balancer data collection example Manufacturer Model Device model Type Cisco 11000 Cisco CSS arrowpoint-load-balancer Alteon LoadBalancer Alteon LoadBalancer Dummy LB Dummy LB Each load balancer can have existing virtual IP addresses defined to it. When ITITO is operational, it will create and delete virtual IPs as it provisions servers into application clusters on demand. Load balancers can also be used as switches. In this case, they will need to be defined as switches in “Switches” on page 10. Chapter 2. Planning 13
  • 28. Virtual IPs Any pre-existing virtual IPs can be defined to ITITO if required, although they will usually take no part in the demonstration. The information required is shown in the following table: Table 2-17 Virtual IP data collection skeleton Virtual IP Load Virtual IP First input Last input Output name balancer address port in range port in range port Each application cluster (see 2.3.5, “Applications and customers” on page 16) that ITITO is to provision automatically will need a unique virtual IP definition for the cluster. 2.3.3 Software Software configuration in ITITO is divided into three categories: Software package Software patch Software stack We address each of these in the following sections. Software package Each single piece of software or data that the customer’s applications require to be provisioned must be defined to ITITO as a software object. This typically includes operating systems, databases, middleware, applications, data, and so on. For each software package that is to be automatically deployed, it is necessary to collect the following information: Table 2-18 Software package data collection skeleton Software name Version Type Package path Install path 14 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 29. There are two valid entries for type: OPERATING_SYSTEM SOFTWARE For the purposes of the demonstration, package and install paths are optional. Software patches Software patches are optional for the demonstration. If any patches or service packs are required by the customer, they need the following basic information for the demonstration: Table 2-19 Software patch data collection skeleton Patch name Type Package path Install path As with the software packages, package path and install path are optional for a demonstration. Software stacks Software stacks are an ITITO concept to group together a number of software packages and software patches so that the stack represents all of the software that must be installed on each type of server when it is provisioned into an application cluster. Each distinct type of server required by any application cluster needs a corresponding software stack. In addition, if any spare pool has to have an initial set of software defined, the software stack should be defined for this state, too. Typically, this could mean that a base operating system is installed on servers in a spare pool with no applications. Software stacks require the following information: Table 2-20 Software stack data collection skeleton Software stack name Software product Position The software stack names must match the software products or patches, or both, defined in the previous sections. The Position column determines the installation order. Chapter 2. Planning 15
  • 30. 2.3.4 Spare pools If the customer has pools of spare servers already available for their applications, information about the names, connections, and types of these machines needs to be determined and entered in the following tables. If the customer does not have any existing pools of machines, for the demonstration, a number of servers will need to be defined to create a spare pool. The customer should be advised that this is a fundamental principle behind ITITO. These pools require the following definitions: Table 2-21 Spare pool network data collection skeleton Spare pool name VLAN Switch fabric Any number of servers can be defined for each pool with the following attributes: Table 2-22 Spare pool data collection skeleton switch module interface card Connected to Connected to Server name switch port Spare pool Connected IP address MAC addr. Managed to switch Network name For ITITO to operate correctly with pooled servers, we strongly advise that each server has at least two network interface cards (NICs), one of which is dedicated to the management LAN. If any NIC has multiple IP addresses, these should be recorded here, too. MAC addresses are optional for the demonstration, but will show up as unknown in the GUI if not specified. 2.3.5 Applications and customers In this section, it is necessary to gather information about the various applications that a customer wants to provision with ITITO. The basic data 16 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 31. required is shown in the following table. For a demonstration, at least two applications should be defined. Table 2-23 Customer/application data collection skeleton Customer name or Application Priority Application cluster business unit Each ITITO implementation can have many customers defined, each of which can have multiple applications, each of which can have multiple application clusters. An application cluster is defined to be a set of servers that provide the same service to an application. The servers are expected to be virtual clones of each other. The priority of each application should be set according to the following table: Table 2-24 Application priority data collection example Service plan Priority Interpretation Platinum Better priority service Gold Medium priority service Silver 10 Poorer priority service Each application cluster requires the following additional definitions: Table 2-25 Cluster information data collection skeleton Application Virtual IP Managed balancer servers servers cluster Switch fabric VLAN Load Max. Pool Min. Chapter 2. Planning 17
  • 32. In this table, Pool is the server pool from which the application cluster provisions and returns servers (resource pool). Each application cluster can be managed or unmanaged. This value should be set to true or false. If the cluster is unmanaged, ITITO will make no attempt to provision servers for this cluster. Typically, this option is used for clusters that provide database facilities. It is usually desirable to show these clusters in the ITITO GUI, but not to actually make changes to them automatically. The Load Balancer column is used to identify the load balancer that is associated with the cluster’s servers. The Virtual IP column refers to the virtual IPs defined in “Virtual IPs” on page 14. Note: It is also possible to configure the service level agreement properties: maximum response time and maximum time available. We recommend that you talk about this during the demonstration. If any cluster has any dedicated servers assigned to it (and usually there will be at least one), these must also be defined. The data required for these is shown in the following table: Table 2-26 Cluster network data collection skeleton Application Connected Connected Connected IP address Managed to switch to switch to switch interface Network address module cluster Server name MAC card port For servers that are permanently assigned to a cluster, the network interface cards should usually not be managed by ITITO. As with pool servers, the MAC addresses are optional, but will show up as unknown in the GUI if not specified. 18 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 33. 2.3.6 Other devices ITITO supports a number of other data center management devices including: Boot servers Terminal servers Blade center management servers These devices might be essential for the operation of a data center, but do not really play any part in a demonstration of ITITO. If it is desirable to show the configuration and that the product supports these devices, they should be included. Boot servers If any servers are to be provisioned by bare-metal builds, it will be necessary to define a boot server for each set of servers that are configured to use the same boot server. Boot servers require the following information to be defined: Table 2-27 Boot server data collection skeleton Name Manufacturer Software IP address Device model Each boot server can also have a network interface card and network interfaces as with other servers in spare pools and clusters: Table 2-28 Boot server network information collection skeleton Connected Connected Connected IP address MAC addr. Managed to switch to switch to switch interface Network module server name Boot card port The following boot servers are valid devices in ITITO Version 1.1: Table 2-29 Boot servers supported by ITITO V1.1 Manufacturer Software Device model Rembo Auto-Deploy Rembo Boot Server IBM Remote Deployment Manager RDM Server Chapter 2. Planning 19
  • 34. IBM Network Installation Manager NIM Server IBM zVM Boot Server zVM Boot Server IBM Cluster Systems Management CSM Management Server Sun Jump Start JumpStart Server HP Rapid Deployment Pack RDP Server If a boot server is used to deploy an operating system, this attribute can be added to the corresponding software stack for the operating system. This is optional for the demonstration. Table 2-30 Boot server/operating system data collection skeleton Software stack name Boot server Terminal servers Terminal servers can be defined to ITITO like boot servers except that there are no supplied device drivers for terminal servers in Version 1.1 of the product: Table 2-31 Terminal server data collection skeleton Name IP address Network interface cards and network interfaces can be defined as with other servers: Table 2-32 Terminal server network information data collection skeleton Connected Connected Connected IP address MAC addr. Managed to switch to switch to switch interface Terminal Network module server name card port 20 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 35. Blade center management servers Each blade system is managed by a central management server that controls all aspects of the blade servers. ITITO uses the blade center management server to perform operations on the blade servers such as reboot, power on, and reconfiguration. If the customer uses blade servers, it might be desirable to show the blade center management server, although the demonstration will make no visible changes to the blade center management server itself. The blade center management server can be defined like the boot server and terminal servers: Table 2-33 Blade center management server data collection skeleton Name Manufacturer Software IP address Device model The following blade systems have device drivers in Version 1.1 of ITITO: Table 2-34 Blade center management servers supported by ITITO V1.1 Manufacturer Blade system Device model RLX Technologies ServerBlades RLX Blade Server HP Proliant Blade Servers Proliant BL Server Network interface cards and network interfaces can also be defined if required: Table 2-35 Blade server network information data collection skeleton Connected Connected Connected IP address MAC addr. to Switch Managed to switch to switch interface Network module server Blade name card port Servers in spare pools or in clusters can be associated with the relevant blade center management server. This information can be appended to servers in the relevant spare pools and clusters: Chapter 2. Planning 21
  • 36. Table 2-36 Blade servers data collection skeleton Server name Blade admin server Blade slot 2.3.7 Scoping This section discusses the process of settling the scope of the demonstration. This should be agreed with the customer prior to beginning work on the development of the demonstration system. The main objective of a customized demonstration is to show the customer what ITITO can do for them in their environment. It will not usually be necessary to show the full extent of their environment, and indeed, could be counter-productive if attempted. From the data gathered, a representative sample of components should be chosen to be used in the demonstration. For example, if a customer has an application that has 100 servers working as a cluster, it is only really necessary to show a few. Also, if a customer has platforms that are not ideal for ITITO such as Tandems or z/OS®, it would be better to focus on the ones that are. Ultimately, if two applications can be agreed on with one, two, or three clusters in each and one to five servers for each cluster, the demonstration should be feasible, representative, and worthwhile. Provided with this document and included in the text is an XML file that contains the following: One customer Two applications Two clusters in each application One dedicated server in each cluster One common resource pool One switch One router One load balancer Three software stacks Six software packages This should be sufficient to demonstrate the key features of ITITO and could perhaps be used simply by changing the names of the applications clusters and pools to the customers’ own names. 22 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 37. The files provided with this document are described in 4.3, “Sample XML files” on page 91. Chapter 2. Planning 23
  • 38. 24 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 39. 3 Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems This chapter describes the installation procedures to get IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator installed for our pre-POC demonstration scenario. Our installation consists of two servers, one hosting an IBM DB2 database server and LDAP Directory, and the second being the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator server. This is considered a typical two server scenario. In the case of a two server installation, as described in this chapter, both servers must be running the same operating system. In this chapter, we provide instructions for installing IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator on Microsoft Windows 2000 Server. The instructions given in this chapter are very detailed and explicit. These instructions are not the only way to install IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator and its related prerequisites, and are meant to be followed to successfully install and set up a IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator environment. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2004. All rights reserved. 25
  • 40. 3.1 Installation process overview Our installation scenario is to be considered as an example only. The following are the names of both servers used during the installation process. These names most likely should be changed to the naming standards of the customer. The server hosting both the IBM DB2 Server and the IBM Directory server will be named TIOdbsrv. The server hosting the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator server will be named TIOsrv. The following table provides the recommended hardware for each server. This is the hardware we used in the ITSO lab environment and we recommend it as a minimum configuration. Note: The values provided in the following table may differ form the information provided in the IBM Tivoli Intelligent Orchestrator and Tivoli Provisioning Manager Release Notes, SC32-1422. They represent the hardware used at the time of writing this Redpaper and serve as our recommendation for a minimum of a two server configuration. Table 3-1 Recommended hardware for Windows 2000 Server IBM Compatible Server: 2.4 GHz Intel Pentium® processor or equivalent 2GB RAM 30 GB disk The following table provides a list of the various products that will need to be installed and configured on each server during the installation procedure per operating system. Please note that both servers must be running the same operating system. Table 3-2 Required software - Windows 2000 TIOdbsrv TIOsrv Windows 2000 Server Windows 2000 Server Cygwin Version 1.3.22 – or later Cygwin Version 1.3.22 – or later IBM DB2 Universal Database™ IBM DB2 Universal Database V8.1.2 Client Workgroup Unlimited Edition V8.1.2 IBM Directory Server, V5.1 IBM Directory Server V5.1 Client 26 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 41. TIOdbsrv TIOsrv IBM WebSphere Application Server Base Edition V5.0.1 IBM WebSphere Application Server Base Edition V5.0.1 Client IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator V1.1.0 The following picture provides an overview of the entire installation process and can be used as reference during the installation. Phase 1 Define the User IDs Define user tioadmin user ID with Administrator / root authority on both servers Define user tioldap user ID with Administrator / root authority on both servers UNIX only: define the mqm user ID in the mqm group. Also create mqbrkrs group TIO TIO and ensure that tioadmin, root and mqm users IDs belongs to it. Database Server Server Phase 2 Prepare SSH communications Install all the prerequisite packages for SSH communication between Servers (CygWin for SSH Windows, openssh for AIX) on both Servers Configure SSH and generate a RSA key on the TIO Server TIO Configure SSH on the TIO database Server Server Copy the RSA key to the TIO database Server TIO Test SSH communication from the TIO Server to the TIO database Server Database Repeat the process for all servers in the Data Center to be managed by IBM Tivoli Intelligent Server ThinkDynamic Orchestrator Phase 3 Prepare the TIO database Server Data source LDAP DB Install the remaining prerequisite packages Install IBM DB2 Universal Database Workgroup Unlimited Edition V8.1.2 Create the database to be used by IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator Populate the database using the provided tablesapce.sql file Central Data TIO Warehouse TIO DB Install IBM Directory Server, V5.1 Database Create the LDAP database and configure IBM Directory Server, V5.1 with the provided suffixes Server and ldap.ldif file Verify the installation Phase 4 Prepare the TIO Server Data source LDAP DB Install the remaining prerequisite packages Install IBM DB2 Universal Database V8.12 Client Install IBM Directory Server V5.1 Client TIO Install IBM Websphere Application Server Base Edition V5.0 Server Central Data Install IBM Websphere Application Server Base Edition V5.0 Fixpack 1 Warehouse TIO DB TIO Apply the MQ CSD03 patch to IBM Websphere Database Apply the MQ fixes for embedded messaging to IBM WebSphere (IY43610 and IY44803) Server Install IBM Websphere Application Server Base Edition V5.0 Client Install IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator V1.1.0 Verify the installation Figure 3-1 ITITO installation overview Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems 27
  • 42. 3.1.1 Recommended installation directories The following table provides a list of recommended installation directories for each product used during the installation process. Note that file paths containing spaces must not be used, as it will cause problems during the installation and configuration process. Table 3-3 Recommended installation directories Product Installation Directory Cygwin Version 1.3.22 c:cygwin IBM DB2 Universal Database Workgroup c:IBMsqllib Unlimited Edition V8.1.2 IBM Directory Server, V5.1 c:IBMldap IBM DB2 Universal Database V8.12 Client c:IBMsqllib IBM Directory Server V5.1 Client c:IBMldap IBM WebSphere Application Server Base c:IBMWebSphereAppServer Edition V5.0.1 IBM WebSphere Application Server Base c:IBMWebSphereAppClient Edition V5.0.1 Client IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic c:cygwinhomethinkcontrol Orchestrator V1.1.0 3.1.2 User IDs and passwords The following table illustrates the user IDs that will be either created during the application install process or created by you, the implementer, before the actual install process begins. Table 3-4 User IDs and passwords User name Password Description Comment tioadmin <user defined> Used to log onto the OS This user ID must be to install IBM Tivoli created manually on Intelligent both servers prior to ThinkDynamic the installation Orchestrator 28 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 43. User name Password Description Comment tioldap <user defined> Used by IBM Tivoli This user ID must be Intelligent created manually on ThinkDynamic the machine hosting Orchestrator to connect the IBM Directory to the Directory Server Server prior to the installation tiodb <user defined> This user ID will be the Created during the instance owner of the IBM DB2 installation IBM Tivoli Intelligent on the server hosting ThinkDynamic the IBM Tivoli Orchestrator database Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator database mqm <user defined> Used by WebSphere This user ID must be MQ created manually on both servers prior to the installation wasadmin wasadmin Used by WebSphere as Defined administration account automatically by the WebSphere installation process tioappadmin tioappadmin This is the IBM Tivoli Defined on the Intelligent Directory Server ThinkDynamic automatically by the Orchestrator IBM Tivoli Intelligent superadmin and is used ThinkDynamic to log into the Web Orchestrator console installation process tiointernal internal Used by IBM Tivoli Defined on the Intelligent Directory Server ThinkDynamic automatically by the Orchestrator for system IBM Tivoli Intelligent initiated actions ThinkDynamic Orchestrator installation process cn=root <user defined> root user ID for the IBM Created during the Directory LDAP Server IBM Directory installation process Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems 29
  • 44. 3.2 Installing and configuring TIOdbsrv - Windows In this section we describe the steps to setup the machine hosting database and the LDAP directory used by the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator on Microsoft Windows 2000 Server. The high level install steps are presented in the following figure. Create tioadmin user id Create tioldap user id Download and install Cygwin Install and configure DB2 Install and configure IBM Directory Server Figure 3-2 TIOdbsrv installation steps The following sections explain each step of the above flow in detail. 3.2.1 Creating the required user IDs Create a local user accounts tioadmin and tioldap as follows: 1. Under Computer Management choose System Tools -> Local users and groups -> Users and add the users tioadmin and tioldap. 2. Select the newly created users and make both of them members of the Administrators group. 3. Select the user ID tioadmin and set its Local Path to: C:Cygwinhomethinkcontrol 4. Select the user ID tioldap and set its Local Path to: C:IBMldap 30 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 45. 3.2.2 Installing and configuring Cygwin Cygwin is used as an Open SSH environment for the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator application to communicate with all other applications through the use of Cygwin’s BASH Shell and can be obtained at the following URL: http://www.cygwin.com/ Ensure you are logged on to the TIOdbsrv machine using the tioadmin user account specified above. Attention: Cygwin Version 1.3.22 or higher must be installed. At the time of writing this Redpaper, Cygwin Version 1.5.5-1 was the current version available for downloading and it was used during our install process. Important: Before you download Cygwin ensure you are logged on using the tioadmin user account specified above and that the tioadmin user has the correct profile properties and is a member of Administrators. 1. Open a browser and go the Cygwin home page: http://www.cygwin.com Select the Install or Update now! option. 2. Choose to open the setup.exe application from its current location 3. The Cygwin Setup window starts the installation wizard, select Next 4. Select Install from Internet 5. Accept default installation directory (C:Cygwin), All Users and DOS options 6. Accept default Package directory 7. Choose the appropriate internet settings. We selected Direct Connection. 8. Select a FTP site from the available list 9. During the Cygwin installation, on the Select Package panel, it is important to select the correct Categories. The installation wizard provides a series of pre-selected packages as default for installation. However, IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator requires additional packages under the Lib and Net categories. The following table describes the required packages that need to be installed in addition the default selection. To select those packages, click the + sign of the Libs and Net categories, and click the Skip button next to the desired package to change the installation option from Skip to Install. Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems 31
  • 46. Tip: We recommend selecting and installing all of the Cygwin packages. Additional Cygwin packages Cygwin Package Action Libs Accept default packages PLUS Regex Net Accept default packages PLUS OpenSSH and OpenSSL 10.When the installation completes, select to create icon on desktop. Select Finish. 3.2.3 Configuring SSH communications When the Cygwin installation completes click on the Cygwin icon to open a bash shell window and perform the following steps to configure SSH: Important: Verify that all servers in your configuration are setup correctly in either DNS and or /etc/hosts. 1. Move to the /usr/bin directory and issue the host configuration ssh-host-config command, as shown in the following example. When prompted for environment variables, press Enter to accept the defaults. $ cd /usr/bin $ ./ssh-host-config -y Generating /etc/ssh_host_key Generating /etc/ssh_host_rsa_key Generating /etc/ssh_host_dsa_key Generating /etc/ssh_config file Privilege separation is set to yes by default since OpenSSH 3.3. However, this requires a non-privileged account called 'sshd'. For more info on privilege separation read /usr/doc/openssh/README.privsep. Warning: The following function requires administrator privileges! Generating /etc/sshd_config file Added ssh to /cygdrive/c/WINNT/system32/drivers/etc/services Added ssh to /etc/inetd.conf Do you want to install sshd as service? Which value should the environment variable CYGWIN have when sshd starts? It's recommended to set at least "ntsec" to be able to change user context without password. Default is "binmode ntsec tty". CYGWIN= The service has been installed under LocalSystem account. 32 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 47. Host configuration finished. Have fun! 2. Export the CYGWIN variable. $ export CYGWIN=ntsec Tip: This command will set an environment variable for products to reference as a global variable. 3. Move to the /var directory and change the attributes of the directory named empty. $ cd /var $ chmod 700 empty 4. Start the SSH service as follows: $ cygrunsrv -S sshd 5. Move to the home directory of the tioadmin user ID and issue the ssh-keygen command to generate the RSA key. You should have an output similar to the following example. $ cd $ pwd /home/thinkcontrol $ ssh-keygen -t rsa -N "" Generating public/private rsa key pair. Enter file in which to save the key (/home/thinkcontrol/.ssh/id_rsa): Created directory '/home/thinkcontrol/.ssh'. Your identification has been saved in /home/thinkcontrol/.ssh/id_rsa. Your public key has been saved in /home/thinkcontrol/.ssh/id_rsa.pub. The key fingerprint is: fd:ca:21:d3:3f:db:fd:d9:56:b2:30:68:16:43:1c:11 tioadmin@tio12 6. Move to the .ssh directory and create the authorized_keys file: $ pwd /home/thinkcontrol $ cd .ssh $ cat id_rsa.pub > authorized_keys 7. To configure SSH to accept connections from new hosts without prompting for confirmation, create a file in the /home/thinkcontrol/.ssh directory called config. Edit the config file and add the line StrictHostKeyChecking no as follows: # cd /home/thinkcontrol/.ssh # touch config # vi config Add in the following line: StrictHostKeyChecking no Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems 33
  • 48. Type the config file. The output should read as follows: StrictHostKeyChecking no 8. To verify that SSH is configured properly, try to access your own machine using the ssh command as shown in the following example. $ ssh tioadmin@localhost Warning: Permanently added 'localhost' (RSA) to the list of known hosts. Fanfare!!! You are successfully logged in to this server!!! $ exit logout Connection to localhost closed. 3.2.4 Installing and configuring IBM DB2 UDB V8.1.2 on Windows This section describes the installation and configuration of IBM DB2 Universal Database, Workgroup Unlimited Edition V8.1.2 on Windows. It also shows the required configuration steps required by IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator. Note: Ensure you perform the IBM DB2 installation logged on as tioadmin. Use the DB2 installation media provided with the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator product. This ensures that you get the correct version and level of DB2 installed. 1. Logged on as tioadmin, move to the drive where the IBM DB2 CD is mounted and run the setup.exe command to start the installation. From the installation window, select Install Product. 2. Select the product we want to install: IBM DB2 Workgroup Server Unlimited Edition and click Next. 3. The Welcome to the DB2 Setup wizard window opens. Click Next. 4. Accept the License Agreement by selecting I accept the terms in the license agreement option. 5. The Select the installation type window opens. Select the Custom Install option. 6. Select Install DB2 Workgroup Server Unlimited Edition on this computer. 7. The Select features window opens, as shown in the next figure. Select the following packages: – Client support – Administration tools – Server support 34 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 49. Also select the installation path. Ensure there are no spaces in the installation path. We used C:IBMSQLLIB. Figure 3-3 Select DB2 Server components 8. Choose Language of choice - English is default. 9. The Set user information for DB2 Administration Server window open, as shown in next figure. Here you have to specify the user ID tiodb as it will be the instance owner of the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator database. The user ID tiodb will be created with the proper authority by the DB2 installation process. Make sure you record the password as you will be prompted for this password during the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator installation. Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems 35
  • 50. Figure 3-4 Set the DB2 administrator user to tiodb 10.The Set up administration contact list window opens. Select Local - Create a contact list on this system. 11.Click Next at the Configure DB2 instances window. 12.At the Prepare the DB2 tools catalog choose Prepare the DB2 tools catalog in a local database. 13.Accept the default values at the Specify a local database to store the DB2 tools catalog window. 14.At the Specify a contact for health monitor notification choose Defer the task until after installation is complete. 15.At the Request satellite information screen choose Defer this task until after installation is complete. 16.At the Start copying files window you have the chance to review the installation options. Click on Install to initiate the installation. 17.Then the installation completes, open a DB2 command window: Start -> IBM DB2 -> Command Line Tools -> Command Window. 18.Issue the db2licm command to add the license provided by IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator: 36 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 51. C:IBMSQLLIBBIN>d: <-- This is the CDROM drive D:>cd db2license D:>db2licm -a ./db2wsue.lic DBI1402I License added successfully. DBI1426I This product is now licensed for use as specified in the License Acceptance and License Information documents pertaining to the licensed copy of this product. USE OF THE PRODUCT CONSTITUTES ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS OF THE IBM LICENSE ACCEPTANCE AND LICENSE INFORMATION DOCUMENTS, LOCATED IN THE FOLLOWING DIRECTORY: "C:IBMSQLLIBlicenseen" 19.Reboot the system Create database and database schema After installing IBM DB2 perform the following steps to create the database and the database schema used by IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator. Important: You must logon to your system using the tiodb user ID to be successful with the DB2 configuration. 1. Logon to the system as the tiodb user ID. 2. Open a DB2 command window. 3. Create the database for IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator by entering the following command: db2 create database <db_name> Where, <db_name> is the name of the database you want to create. Make sure the database name follow the DB2 naming conventions and that you record it as you will require it when installing IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator. You can confirm the creation of the database by issuing the following command: db2 list database directory C:IBMSQLLIBBIN>db2 create database ITITODB DB20000I The CREATE DATABASE command completed successfully. C:IBMSQLLIBBIN>db2 list database directory System Database Directory Number of entries in the directory = 2 Database 1 entry: Database alias = ITITODB Database name = ITITODB Database drive = C:DB2 Database release level = a.00 Comment = Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems 37
  • 52. Directory entry type = Indirect Catalog database partition number = 0 Database 2 entry: Database alias = TOOLSDB Database name = TOOLSDB Database drive = C:DB2 Database release level = a.00 Comment = Directory entry type = Indirect Catalog database partition number = 0 C:IBMSQLLIBBIN> 4. Copy the tablespace.sql script located in the /samples directory on the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator CD to your IBM DB2 installation directory (in our case C:IBMSQLLIBBIN). 5. Create the tablespace for the database by performing the following steps: db2 connect to <db_name> user tiodb using <tiodb_pwd> Where, <db_name> is the name of the database you created in the previous step, and <tiodb_pwd> is the password for user ID tiodb. Then run the following command: db2 -tvf tablespace.sql C:IBMSQLLIBBIN>db2 connect to ITITODB user tiodb Enter current password for tiodb: Database Connection Information Database server = DB2/NT 8.1.2 SQL authorization ID = TIODB Local database alias = ITITODB C:IBMSQLLIBBIN>db2 -tvf tablespace.sql CREATE BUFFERPOOL IBM16K SIZE 250 PAGESIZE 16K NOT EXTENDED STORAGE DB20000I The SQL command completed successfully. CREATE BUFFERPOOL IBM8K SIZE 250 PAGESIZE 8K NOT EXTENDED STORAGE DB20000I The SQL command completed successfully. CREATE REGULAR TABLESPACE IBM8KSPACE PAGESIZE 8K MANAGED BY SYSTEM USING ('IBM8KSPACE') BUFFERPOOL IBM8K DROPPED TABLE RECOVERY OFF DB20000I The SQL command completed successfully. CREATE REGULAR TABLESPACE IBM16KSPACE PAGESIZE 16K MANAGED BY SYSTEM USING ('IBM16KSPACE') BUFFERPOOL IBM16K DROPPED TABLE RECOVERY OFF DB20000I The SQL command completed successfully. CREATE TEMPORARY TABLESPACE IBM8KTEMPSPACE PAGESIZE 8K MANAGED BY SYSTEM USING ('IBM8KTEMPSPACE') BUFFERPOOL IBM8K DROPPED TABLE RECOVERY OFF DB20000I The SQL command completed successfully. CREATE TEMPORARY TABLESPACE IBM16KTEMPSPACE PAGESIZE 16K MANAGED BY SYSTEM USING ('IBM16KTEMPSPACE') BUFFERPOOL IBM16K DROPPED TABLE RECOVERY OFF DB20000I The SQL command completed successfully. C:IBMSQLLIBBIN> 38 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 53. 3.2.5 Installing and configuring IBM Directory Server V5.1 In this section we show the installation and configuration steps of IBM Directory Server, V5.1. In a IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator environment the IBM Directory Server can be installed on any system using any supported operating system. In our case study scenario, we decided to install IBM Directory Server on the same machine as the IBM DB2 server. In any case, an LDAP client must be installed on the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator machine to allow it to communicate with the IBM Directory server. To install and configure IBM Directory Server 5.1, perform the following steps: 1. Log on to the system as tioadmin. 2. Ensure that the user ID tioldap has been created using the guidelines presented in 3.1.2 User IDs and passwords on page 30. Important: This implementation of LDAP can be in a shared environment but it will still need to have a dedicated LDAP ID (tioldap) created to service the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator application. 3. Insert the IBM Directory Server, 5.1 CD in the drive and start the setup.exe located in the ids_ismp folder to start the installation. 4. Select Language of choice for the installation process. English is set to default. 5. The installation wizard starts the installation process click Next. 6. Accept the License Agreement by selecting I accept the terms in the license agreement option. 7. Because this installation process occurs in the IBM DB2 server machine, the install should detect that IBM DB2 is already installed. 8. Select the installation path. Ensure there are no spaces in the installation path. We used C:IBMLDAP. 9. Choose a language of choice for the IBM Directory Server. English is set to default. 10.The Select the installation type window opens. Select the Custom Install option. 11.The Select features window opens, as shown in next figure. Select the following packages: – Client SDK – Web Administration – Server – IBM WebSphere Application Server - Express Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems 39
  • 54. – GSKit Attention: If you are installing IBM Directory Server on a dedicated server, which is not the IBM DB2 server, ensure the DB2 option is selected. IBM Directory Server requires that a local database be installed. Figure 3-5 Select IBM Directory Server components 12.At the Start copying files window you have the chance to review the installation options. Click on Next to initiate the installation. 13.The installation wizard installs all the selected applications and presents the IBM Directory Server V5.1 Readme files. 14.We recommend that you choose to restart your system at a later time because there is still one step left to complete the install process. Choose No, I will restart my system at a later time. Click Next and then Finish. 15.Copy the thinkdynamics.schema file located in the /samples directory on the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator CD to your IBM Directory installation directory (in our case C:IBMLDAP). 16.Reboot the system. 40 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 55. After installing IBM Directory perform the following steps to create the database and configure the IBM Directory server used by IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator: Important: You must logon to your system using the tioadmin user ID in order to be successful with the IBM Directory configuration. 17.At the system restart, logon as tioadmin. 18.Ensure the thinkdynamics.schema file located in the /samples directory on the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator CD has been copied to the IBM Directory installation directory. 19.The IBM Directory Server Configuration Tool window opens. The Configuration Tool can also be opened by Click START > Programs > IBM Directory Server 5.1 > Directory Configuration. 20.Select Administrator DN/password and set the LDAP Administrator to cn=root and enter a password. Make sure you record the password, as you will need during the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator installation. Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems 41
  • 56. Figure 3-6 Configure the LDAP Administrator to IBM Directory Server 21.Select Configure database and follow the prompts to create a new database. a. When prompted for a user ID to configure the database provide tioldap. The user tioldap will be the instance owner for the LDAP database used by IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator. b. When prompted for the database name, enter the database name of choice. Make sure the database name follows the IBM DB2 naming conventions. Record the database name as it will be required during the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator installation process. In our case study scenario use used LDAPDB. c. Follow the wizard final steps to create the database and accept the default values. At the end, you will have the chance to review the database settings before creating the database. 22.Select Manage suffixes and set the Suffix DN to dc=ibm,dc=com. 42 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 57. Figure 3-7 Managing IBM Directory Server suffixes 23.Select Manage Schema files and create the schema for the LDAP database. Browse to the thinkdynamics.schema file you copied to your IBM Directory installation director and click Add, to add the file to the Current schema files list. Click OK. 24.Select Import ldif data and populate the database with the information provided in the ldap.dif file. Browse to the /samples directory on the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator CD and select the ldap.ldif file. Make sure the Standard import radio button is selected and click Import. Expect to see an output similar to the following on the Task messages section: Plugin of type DATABASE is successfully loaded from C:IBMLDAPlibback-config.dll. ldif2db: 37 entries have been successfully added out of 37 attempted. Close the IBM Directory Server Configuration Tool. Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems 43
  • 58. 25.Open a command line and start the embedded WebSphere server by running the following command: C:IBMldapAppsrvbinstartserver server1 If you have changed the default installation directory, substitute the appropriate path in the command above. 26.Open the IBM Directory Server Web console by opening a Web browser and going to the following URL: http://localhost:9080/IDSWebApp/IDSjsp/Login.jsp 27.Select LDAP Host name to Console Admin, log in using the user ID superadmin and password secret, then click Login. 28.Expand Console Administration, click on Manage Console Servers, and click Add to add your IBM Directory server to the list. 29.Enter the host name of the IBM Directory server machine and click OK. Figure 3-8 Logging in to the IBM Directory Server Web Administration Tool 44 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 59. 30.Start the IBM Directory server service by opening DOS command line and running the following command: C:IBMldapbinibmslapd If you changed the default installation directory, substitute the appropriate path in the command above. 31.Log out of the Web console and log in using the IBM Directory server just defined using the user ID cn=root and the password you set during the IBM Directory server configuration. 32.Expand Directory management and select Manage entries. Select dc=ibm,dc=com and click Expand. Verify that all the entries from the ldap.dif file are listed. 3.3 Installing and configuring TIOsrv - Windows In this section we describe the steps to setup the machine hosting the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator Server on Microsoft Windows 2000 Server. The high-level install steps are presented in the following figure. Create tioadmin User ID Download and install Cygwin Configure SSH Install and configure DB2 Client Install and configure IBM Directory Client Install and configure IBM WerbSphere Server Apply IBM WebSphere FixPak 1 and required fixes Install and configure IBM WerbSphere Client Install and configure IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator Figure 3-9 TIOsrv installation steps Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems 45
  • 60. The following sections explain each step of the above flow in detail. 3.3.1 Creating the required user IDs Create a local user account tioadmin as follows: 1. Under Computer Management choose System Tools -> Local users and groups -> Users and add the user tioadmin. 2. Select the newly created user and make it members of the Administrators group. 3. Select the user ID tioadmin and set its Local Path to: C:Cygwinhomethinkcontrol 3.3.2 Installing and configuring Cygwin Instructions for obtaining, installing and configuring Cygwin are provided in 3.2.2, “Installing and configuring Cygwin” on page 31. Please follow those instructions for setting up Cygwin on the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator server machine. 3.3.3 Configuring SSH communications The SSH configuration follows similar guidelines as described in 3.2.3, “Configuring SSH communications” on page 32, except the fact that there is no need to generate a new RSA public key. Here we provide the entire SSH configuration process required to allow the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator to communicate with the IBM DB2 server via SSH. When the Cygwin installation completes click on the Cygwin icon to open a bash shell window and perform the following steps to configure SSH: Important: Verify that all servers in your configuration are setup correctly in either DNS and or /etc/hosts 1. Move to the /usr/bin directory and issue the host configuration program ssh-host-config as shown in the following example. When prompted for environment variables, press Enter to accept the defaults. 46 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 61. $ cd /usr/bin $ ./ssh-host-config -y Generating /etc/ssh_host_key Generating /etc/ssh_host_rsa_key Generating /etc/ssh_host_dsa_key Generating /etc/ssh_config file Privilege separation is set to yes by default since OpenSSH 3.3. However, this requires a non-privileged account called 'sshd'. For more info on privilege separation read /usr/doc/openssh/README.privsep. Warning: The following function requires administrator privileges! Generating /etc/sshd_config file Added ssh to /cygdrive/c/WINNT/system32/drivers/etc/services Added ssh to /etc/inetd.conf Do you want to install sshd as service? Which value should the environment variable CYGWIN have when sshd starts? It's recommended to set at least "ntsec" to be able to change user context without password. Default is "binmode ntsec tty". CYGWIN= The service has been installed under LocalSystem account. Host configuration finished. Have fun! 2. Export the CYGWIN variable. $ export CYGWIN=ntsec Tip: This command will set an environment variable for products to reference as a global variable. 3. Move to the /var directory and change the attributes of the directory named empty. $ cd /var $ chmod 700 empty 4. Start the SSH service as follows: $ cygrunsrv -S sshd 5. Move to the home directory of the tioadmin user ID and create the .ssh directory. $ cd $ pwd /home/thinkcontrol $ mkdir .ssh 6. Copy the key files from the IBM DB2 server machine (TIOdbsrv) to c:cygwinhomethinkcontrol.ssh directory on the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator server machine (TIOsrv). The keys are located in the c:cygwinhomethinkcontrol.ssh directory and are the following: Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems 47
  • 62. id_rsa id_rsa.pub authorized_keys Note: You will need to configure SSH communications and copy the key files on all other servers in your environment that are running Cygwin and need to communicate with the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator server. 7. To configure SSH to accept connections from new hosts without prompting for confirmation, create a file in the /home/thinkcontrol/.ssh directory called config. Edit the config file and add the line StrictHostKeyChecking no as follows: # cd /home/thinkcontrol/.ssh # touch config # vi config Add in the following line: StrictHostKeyChecking no List the config file. The output should read as follows: StrictHostKeyChecking no 8. To verify that SSH is configured properly, try to access the ITITO database server machine using the ssh command as shown in the following example. $ ssh tioadmin@tio12 Warning: Permanently added 'tio12,9.3.187.163' (RSA) to the list of known hosts. Fanfare!!! You are successfully logged in to this server!!! $ exit logout Connection to tio12 closed. 3.3.4 Installing IBM DB2 Universal Database V8.1.2 Client This section provides instructions to install the IBM DB2 Universal Database V8.12 Client. Note: Ensure you perform the IBM DB2 installation logged on as tioadmin. Use the DB2 installation media provided with the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator product. This ensures that you get the correct version and level of DB2 installed. 48 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 63. 1. Logged on as tioadmin, move to the directory where IBM DB2 and run the setup.exe command to start the installation. From the installation window, select Install Products. 2. Select the product we want to install: DB2 Administration Client. 3. The Welcome to the DB2 Setup wizard windows opens. Click Next. 4. Accept the License Agreement by selecting I accept the terms in the license agreement option. 5. The Select the installation type window opens. Select the Custom Install option. 6. Select Install DB2 Administration Client on this computer. 7. The Select features window opens, as shown below. Select the following package: – Client support Also select the installation path. Ensure there are no spaces in the installation path. We used C:IBMSQLLIB. Figure 3-10 DB2 Client install options 8. Choose Language of choice - English is default. Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems 49
  • 64. 9. At the Configure NetBios screen, click Next. 10.At the Start copying files window you have the chance to review the installation options. Click on Install to initiate the installation. 11.When the installation completes, open a DB2 command window: Start -> IBM DB2 -> Command Line Tools -> Command Window. 12.Run the following commands from the DB2 command line processor to catalog and connect to the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator database on the IBM DB2 server: db2 catalog tcpip node <db_node> remote <dbserver_hostname> server 50000 db2 catalog db <db_name> as <db_name> at node <db_node> Where, the variables are defined as follows: db_node A local, user-defined alias for the node to be cataloged. This is an arbitrary name used to identify the node. It should be a meaningful name to make it easier to remember. dbserver_hostname The hostname of the IBM DB2 server. db_name Specifies the name of the database to catalog. This is the name of the database created for the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator server. 13.You can test the catalog by issuing the following commands: db2 connect to <db_name> user tiodb C:IBMSQLLIBBIN>db2 catalog tcpip node tio11 remote tio12 server 50000 DB20000I The CATALOG TCPIP NODE command completed successfully. DB21056W Directory changes may not be effective until the directory cache is refreshed. C:IBMSQLLIBBIN>db2 catalog db ITITODB as ITITODB at node tio11 DB20000I The CATALOG DATABASE command completed successfully. DB21056W Directory changes may not be effective until the directory cache is refreshed. C:IBMSQLLIBBIN>db2 connect to ITITODB user tiodb Enter current password for tiodb: Database Connection Information Database server = DB2/NT 8.1.2 SQL authorization ID = TIODB Local database alias = ITITODB C:IBMSQLLIBBIN> 3.3.5 Installing and configuring IBM Directory V5.1 Client In this section we show the installation and configuration steps of IBM Directory V5.1 Client on Windows. In our case study scenario the IBM Directory Server is installed on the same machine as the DB2 server. In any configuration of choice, 50 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 65. an LDAP client must be installed on the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator machine to allow it to communicate with the IBM Directory server. To install and configure IBM Directory Client V5.1, perform the following steps: 1. Log on to the system as tioadmin. 2. Ensure that the IBM Directory Server is up and running before continuing. 3. Insert the IBM Directory Server, 5.1 CD in the drive and start the setup.exe located in the ids_ismp folder to start the installation. 4. Select Language of choice for the installation process. English is set to default. 5. The installation wizard starts the installation process click Next. 6. Accept the License Agreement by selecting I accept the terms in the license agreement option. 7. Select the installation path. Ensure there are no spaces in the installation path. We used C:IBMLDAP. 8. Choose a language of choice for the IBM Directory Client. English is set to default. 9. The Select the installation type window opens. Select the Custom Install option. 10.The Select features window opens, as shown below. Select the following packages: – Client SDK Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems 51
  • 66. Figure 3-11 LDAP Client install options 11.At the Start copying files window you have the chance to review the installation options. Click on Next to initiate the installation. 12.The installation wizard installs the selected application (Client SDK) and presents the IBM Directory V5.1 Client Readme file. 13.It is recommended to choose to restart your system at this time. Click Next and then Finish. 14.Reboot the system. 3.3.6 Installing IBM WebSphere Application Server Base V5.0 In this section we describe the IBM WebSphere Application Server Base Edition V5.0. Later it will be required to install the IBM WebSphere Fixpack 1 to comply with the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator required version of IBM WebSphere: V5.0.1. Note: Ensure you perform the IBM WebSphere Application Server installation logged on as tioadmin. 52 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 67. Use the IBM WebSphere Application Server installation media provided with the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator product. This ensures that you get the correct version and level of IBM WebSphere Application Server installed. To install IBM WebSphere Application Server Base Edition V5.0, perform the following steps: 1. Log on to the system as tioadmin. 2. Move to the nt directory of the drive the IBM WebSphere Application Server CD is mounted and issue the following command to start the installation process: install.exe 3. Choose a language to be used during the install process. 4. The Welcome to the IBM WebSphere install wizard window opens. Click Next 5. Accept the License Agreement by selecting I accept the terms in the license agreement option. 6. The installation wizard checks the prerequisites. The Select the installation type window opens. Select Custom Install. 7. The Select features window opens, as shown in the next figure. From the default selection list, deselect the Application Server Samples option. Figure 3-12 WebSphere install options Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems 53
  • 68. 8. The Installation path window opens. Select the installation path for the various components to be installed. Here are the installation paths used in our scenario. Make sure there are no spaces in the installation path. WebSphere installation directories Product Installation Directory IBM WebSphere Application Server Base Edition c:IBMWebSphereAppServer V5.0.1 IBM Embedded Messaging Server and Client c:IBMWebSphereMQ IBM HTTP Server c:IBMHTTPServer 9. The install wizard prompts for the node name and hostname of the computer. Supply the fully qualified DNS name on the Hostname field. In our scenario we used the following: Node Name: tio11 Host Name: tio11.itsc.austin.ibm.com 10.Select both IBM WebSphere and IBM HTTP Server to run as a Windows service. Also, specify the tioadmin user ID and password so that those services run under tioadmin authority. Figure 3-13 WebSphere runs as Windows service 54 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 69. Attention: If a dialog appears with message ID INST0056E, click OK and continue. No further action is required. 11.At the Start copying files window you have the chance to review the installation options. Click Next to initiate the installation. 12.Choose to wether or not to register the product at this time. 13.When the installation completes, the IBM WebSphere First Steps window opens. Select Exit and then Finish to end the install process. 3.3.7 Install the IBM WebSphere fixpack 1 and required fixes In this section we provide the installation steps for upgrading IBM WebSphere Application Server Base Edition with the required fixpack1 and fixes. The following steps need to be performed: 1. Install IBM WebSphere fixpack 1. 2. Apply the MQ CSD03 fix. 3. Apply the IY43610 fix. 4. Apply the IY44803 fix. 5. Apply the PQ75055 fix. Install IBM WebSphere fixpack 1 After installing IBM WebSphere Application Server Base Edition V5.0 you must install the fixpack 1, which is shipped with IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator. Note: When installing the fixpack 1, ensure that the IBM WebSphere Application Server, IBM HTTP and IBM HTTP Administration services are stopped. The installation will fail if these services are running. Here we provide the steps for installing the IBM WebSphere fixpack 1. 1. Still logged on as tioadmin, ensure that the IBM WebSphere Application Server, IBM HTTP and IBM HTTP Administration services are stopped. 2. Start the fixpack install process by opening a DOS prompt window and moving to the <IBM WebSphere installation directory>bin directory and initializing the WebSphere command line environment by running the following script: cd IBMWebSphereAppServerbin setupCmdLine.bat Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems 55
  • 70. 3. Move to the drive where the IBM WebSphere fixpack 1 cd is mounted. Run the following script: updateWizard.bat Tip: Do not run the updateWizard.bat file through the GUI. 4. The Welcome to the Update installation wizard for IBM WebSphere window opens. Click Next. 5. The update wizard checks the current level of IBM WebSphere installed. Click Next. 6. The Select the installation type window opens. Select Install fix packs. 7. The update wizard prompts for the location of the fixpack 1. 8. Select the fixpack to be installed (was50_fp1_win). Figure 3-14 IBM WebSphere Fix Pack 1 installation 9. Select to upgrade the following components: – IBM HTTP Server – Embedded Messaging 10.At the Start copying files window you have the chance to review the update options. Click Next to initiate the update. 56 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 71. When the update wizard completes, the following dialog is displayed. Figure 3-15 IBM WebSphere Fix Pack 1 installation completed Apply the MQ CSD03 fix The MQ CSD03 fix is located in the /patches/csd03 directory in the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator CD. Note: When installing the MQ CSD03 fix, ensure that the IBM WebSphere Application Server is stopped. The installation will fail if this service is running. Here we provide the steps for installing the MQ CSD 03 fix. 1. Still logged on as tioadmin, ensure that the IBM WebSphere Application Server is stopped. 2. Start the fixpack install process by opening a DOS prompt window and moving to the patchesCsd03 directory of the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator CD and running the following program WINDOWS_CSD03_U200187A.exe 3. Follow the wizard instructions to extract the file for the fix. 4. When the file extraction finishes, click Install to begin the CSD 03 fix installation. Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems 57
  • 72. Figure 3-16 WebSphere MQ CSD 03 install 5. At the end of the installation, verify the version of the WebSphere MQ by running the mqver command: C:IBMWebSphereAppServerbin>mqver Name: WebSphere MQ Version: 530.3 CSD03 CMVC level: p530-CSD03J BuildType: IKAP - (Production) Apply the IY43610 fix The IY43610 fix is located in the /patches/I_43610 directory in the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator CD. Note: When installing the IY43610 fix, ensure that the IBM WebSphere Application Server and the WebSphere Embedded Messaging services are stopped. The installation will fail if this service is running. Here we provide the steps for installing the IY43610 fix. 1. Still logged on as tioadmin, ensure that the IBM WebSphere Application Server and the WebSphere Embedded Messaging services are stopped. 2. Move to the <WebSphere MQ install directory>bin directory. In our case the installation directory is c:IBMWebSphereMQ. Take a backup copy of the existing files: – imqb23vn.dll – imqc23vn.dll – imqs23vn.dll – imqb23in.dll 58 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 73. – imqc23in.dll – imqs23in.dll 3. Start the fixpack install process by opening a DOS prompt window and moving to the patchesI_43610 directory of the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator CD. 4. Copy the IY43610.windows.zip file to a working directory (c:temp for example) and unzip the file: unzip IY43610.windows.zip 5. Copy the files to the <MQ install directory>bin directory replacing the existing files with these new versions. Apply the IY44803 fix The IY44803 fix is located in the /patches/I_44803 directory in the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator CD. Note: When installing the IY44803 fix, ensure that the IBM WebSphere Application Server and the WebSphere Embedded Messaging services are stopped. The installation will fail if this service is running. Here we provide the steps for installing the IY44803 fix. 1. Still logged on as tioadmin, ensure that the IBM WebSphere Application Server and the WebSphere Embedded Messaging services are stopped. 2. Move to the <WebSphere MQ install directory> directory. In our case the installation directory is c:IBMWebSphereMQ. 3. Take a backup copy of following directories under the WebSphere MQ installation directory: javabin javalib 4. Create the following directories: tools toolsjava doc 5. Start the fixpack install process by opening a DOS prompt window and moving to the patchesI_44803 directory of the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator CD. 6. Copy the IY44803.windows.zip file to a working directory (c:temp for example) and unzip the file: unzip IY44803.windows.zip Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems 59
  • 74. 7. Copy the files to the appropriate directory replacing the existing files with these new versions as follows: – Copy all the files under bin to C:IBMWebSphereMQjavabin – Copy all the files under lib to C:IBMWebSphereMQjavalib – Copy the one file under doc to C:IBMWebSphereMQdoc – Copy the content under samples to C:IBMWebSphere MQtoolsjava Apply the PQ75055 fix The PQ75055 fix is located in the /patches/WAS_PQ75055 directory in the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator CD. Note: When installing the PQ75055 fix, ensure that the IBM WebSphere Application Server and the WebSphere Embedded Messaging services are stopped. The installation will fail if this service is running. Here we provide the steps for installing the PQ75055 fix. 1. Still logged on as tioadmin, ensure that the IBM WebSphere Application Server and the WebSphere Embedded Messaging services are stopped. 2. Start the fix install process by opening a DOS prompt window and moving to the <IBM WebSphere installation directory>bin directory and initializing the WebSphere command line environment by running the following script: cd IBMWebSphereAppServerbin setupCmdLine.bat 3. Move to the <WebSphere install directory> directory and create a directory named update. In our case the installation directory is c:IBMWebSphere. cd IBMWebSphereAppServer mkdir update 4. Copy the apar_PQ75055.zip file from the patchesWAS_PQ75055 directory on the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator CD to the update directory. 5. Copy the WindowsUpdateInstaller.zip file from the patchesWAS_PQ75055UpdateInstallerwin directory on the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator CD to the update directory. 6. Unzip the WindowsUpdateInstaller.zip file. unzip WindowsUpdateInstaller.zip 7. Unzip the apar_PQ75055.zip file. unzip apar_PQ75055.zip 8. Start the update wizard by running updateWizard.bat from command line: 60 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 75. updateWizard.bat Tip: Do not run the updateWizard.bat file through the GUI. The Wizard may open up in the background. 9. Choose a Language of choice for install screens. 10.The Welcome to the Update installation wizard for IBM WebSphere window opens. Click Next. 11.The update wizard checks the current level of IBM WebSphere installed. Click Next. 12.The Select the installation type window opens. Select Install fixes. 13.The update wizard prompts for the location of the PQ75055 fix. Attention: On the fix directory panel, ensure the directory path is: <WebSphere install directory>updateefixes.. (type in both dots) Figure 3-17 PQ75055 installation directory 14.Select the fix to be installed (PQ75055). Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems 61
  • 76. Figure 3-18 IBM WebSphere PQ75055 installation 15.In the Start copying files window you have the chance to review the update options. Click Next to initiate the update. The next dialog you will see is the update wizard completion window shown below: 62 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 77. Figure 3-19 IBM WebSphere PQ75055 fix installation completion Install and configure WebSphere Application Client V5.0.1 In this section we describe the IBM WebSphere Application Client V5.0.1 Note: Ensure you perform the IBM WebSphere Application Server installation logged on as tioadmin. Use the IBM WebSphere Application Client installation media provided with the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator product. This ensures that you get the correct version and level of IBM WebSphere Application Client installed. To install IBM WebSphere Application Client V5.0, perform the following steps: 1. Log on to the system as tioadmin. 2. Move to the nt directory of the drive the IBM WebSphere Application Client CD is mounted and issue the following command to start the installation process: install.exe 3. Choose a language to be used during the install process. 4. The Welcome to the IBM WebSphere install wizard window opens. Click Next Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems 63
  • 78. 5. Accept the License Agreement by selecting I accept the terms in the license agreement option. 6. The installation wizard checks the prerequisites. The Select the installation type window opens. Select Custom Install. 7. The Select features window opens, as shown in the next figure. From the default selection list, deselect the Samples option. Figure 3-20 WebSphere Client install options 8. The Installation path window opens. Select the installation path for the various components to be installed. We used c:IBMWebSphereAppClient Make sure there are no spaces in the installation path. Attention: The IBM WebSphere Application Client must be installed in the WebSphere home directory. If you selected a custom installation directory for WebSphere Application Server, then you must install the Application Client in the same directory as WebSphere Application Server. For example, if you installed WebSphere Application Server in C:IBMWebSphereAppServer, then the WebSphere Application Client should be installed in C:IBMWebSphereAppclient. 9. The install wizard prompts for the hostname and port number of the WebSphere Server computer. Supply the fully qualified DNS name on the 64 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 79. Hostname field and accept the default. In our scenario we used the fully qualified hostname of our IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator server machine: tio11.itsc.austin.ibm.com 10.At the Start copying files window you have the chance to review the installation options. Click Next to initiate the installation. 11.Choose to whether or not to register the product at this time. 12.When the installation completes, select Finish to end the install process. 13.Reboot your system at this point. 14.Log on to the system as tioadmin. Note: Ensure you perform the following steps logged on as tioadmin. 15.Move to the <WebSphere Client Install Directory>javajrelibsecurity directory. 16.Edit the java.security file and add the following at the very end of the file login.configuration.provider=com.ibm.security.auth.login.ConfigFile login.config.url.1=file:/<WAS_Client_instdir>/properties/wsjaas_client.conf Where, <WAS_Client_instdir> is the WebSphere Application Client installation directory. # Class to instantiate as the javax.security.auth.login.Configuration provider login.configuration.provider=com.ibm.security.auth.login.ConfigFile # Default login configuration file login.config.url.1=file:/C:/IBM/WebSPhere/AppClient/properties/wsjaas_clien t.conf Important: You must use forward slashes in the directory path for the line, including the WebSphere Application Client installation directory. 17.Move to the <WebSphere Client Install Directory>properties directory. 18.Edit the sas.client.props and locate the line: com.ibm.CORBA.loginSource=prompt And change it to: com.ibm.CORBA.loginSource=none Change the default transaction log size Perform the following steps to change the default transaction log size: Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems 65
  • 80. 1. Start the IBM WebSphere Server service using the Windows Services tool. 2. Start the IBM WebSphere Application Server Administrative Console by selecting Programs -> IBM WebSphere -> Application Server -> Administrative Console 3. Provide an User ID to be used for logging purposes only. 4. In the navigation pane, select Server -> Application Servers. 5. Select server1 under the server list. This displays the properties of the application server, server1, in the content pane. 6. Select the Transaction Service link, to display the properties page for the transaction service. 7. Under the Configuration Tab, change the value of the Transaction log directory attribute to the following value: <WebSphere_install_directory>/tranlog/server1;10M Where, <WebSphere_install_directory> is the IBM WebSphere Application Server installation directory. For example, in our scenario we used: C:IBMWebSphereAppServer/tranlog/server1;10M Important: You have to use back slashes on the IBM WebSphere Application Server installation directory and forward slashes on the rest of the path. 66 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 81. Figure 3-21 Changing the transaction log size 8. Click OK to make the changes effective. 9. Save the changes before exiting the BM WebSphere Application Server Administrative Console. 10.Stop and Start the IBM WebSphere Server service using the Windows Services tool. 3.3.8 Installing IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator This section provides instructions on installing IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator on the TIOsrv machine running Windows 2000 Server. Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems 67
  • 82. Important: Before proceeding with the installation steps, ensure that the following activities are completed. The machine hosting the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator database and Directory Server have been setup and all prerequisite software is configured and operational. This has been covered in 3.2, “Installing and configuring TIOdbsrv - Windows” on page 30. All the prerequisite software for IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator are installed, configured and up and running. This has been covered in this section. Ensure that SSH communication between the TIOsrv machine and TIOdbsrv machine is operational. Note: Ensure you perform the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator installation logged on as tioadmin. To install and configure IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator perform the following steps: 1. Log on to the system as tioadmin. 2. Set the system PATH variable to include the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator binary files as follows: Click Start-> Settings-> Control Panel-> System-> Advanced Tab. Click the Environment Variables button and add the following line to the System PATH variable: C:cygwinhomethinkcontrolbin If you installed Cygwin in a custom directory, substitute that path. 3. Mount the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator CD into the CD drive. Move to the to the /install directory and run the setupwin32.exe command. 4. The Welcome to the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator install wizard window opens. Click Next. 68 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 83. Figure 3-22 IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator welcome window 5. Accept the License Agreement by selecting I accept the terms in the license agreement option. 6. Because IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator leverages the Cygwin application, the installation wizard prompt for the Cygwin installation directory. 7. The IBM Directory Server Information window opens. Provide the following information about LDAP (defined during the IBM Directory Server configuration): – LDAP Administrator user ID and password. This is the root user ID. – Fully qualified hostname of the IBM Directory Server machine – TCPIP port number used to communicate with the IBM Directory Server. Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems 69
  • 84. Figure 3-23 IBM Directory Server information 8. On the IBM WebSphere Configuration panel, specify the DNS suffix name of the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator server and the directory where IBM WebSphere Application Server is installed. 70 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 85. Figure 3-24 IBM WebSphere Application Server information After you click Next, the installation wizard will verify that it can communicate with the IBM WebSphere Application Server and that the IBM WebSphere Application Server is properly configured for IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator. This may take a few minutes. 9. The IBM DB2 Server Information window opens. Provide the following information about IBM DB2 (defined during the IBM DB2 Server configuration). a. Remote Alias for the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator database. In our scenario we defined the alias as the same name as the database name created in the TIOdbsrv machine: ITITODB. b. The user ID and password of the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator database owner. This is the tiodb user ID. c. The fully qualified hostname of the IBM DB2 Database Server. d. TCPIP port number used to communicate with the IBM DB2 Database Server. e. The IBM DB2 Client installation directory on the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator machine. Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems 71
  • 86. Figure 3-25 IBM DB2 Server information 10.At the Installation Preview window you have the chance to review the installation options. Click Next to initiate the installation. 72 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 87. Figure 3-26 Installation Preview window 11.As IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator is being installed, a panel displays showing the progress of the installation. The installation is complete when the summary panel displays. If you would like to start the IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator services immediately, click the check box. Chapter 3. Installing the demonstration systems 73
  • 88. Figure 3-27 Installation Summary window 74 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 89. 4 Chapter 4. Creating the demonstration This section explains how to build the ITITO data center model and contains the following sections: A discussion of the tools that can be used to build the data center model Guidance on converting the gathered data into an XML input file Sample XML files Advice about loading the data center model Advice about configuring the ITITO simulator to provide a sample load for the demonstration Some areas to test before demonstrating © Copyright IBM Corp. 2004. All rights reserved. 75
  • 90. 4.1 Tools The ITITO data center model (DCM) can be built in one of two ways: Defining each component using the Web management GUI Importing the DCM definitions using one or more XML files The advantage of the Web management GUI is that it is easy, although a bit time-consuming, but the main disadvantage is that the data center model cannot be reused on any other project because there is no export facility in ITITO Version 1.1. Conversely, building the DCM using XML files can be quite complex, time-consuming, and prone to errors. The main advantage of this method is that it can be re-used, copied, and extended more easily at any time in the future. Building the DCM is the recommended method, and a number of XML files are provided as examples. A number of software packages are available to edit XML. These range from very simple to very complex and expensive. The selection of tools is largely a matter of choice and budget. Some advice and guidelines are presented here. The tools discussed are: WordPad or Notepad Cooktop XMLSpy We discuss the benefits and disadvantages of each tool separately. 4.1.1 WordPad or Notepad These editors provide absolutely no assistance with editing XML files. They do not guide, validate, or display the XML elements in different colors. A significant degree of familiarity with XML structures is recommended if either of these editors is chosen. On the plus side, they are always available on every Windows-based system, and if quick changes are required, they might be all that is needed. 4.1.2 Cooktop This is a freeware dedicated XML editor that can be obtained from: http://www.xmlcooktop.com. Cooktop is a Windows-only editor that has a small download and footprint and provides the following useful facilities: It displays the XML file with color-coded text. It can validate the XML file against the DTD definition file. 76 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 91. It can display the structure of the XML elements graphically. Cooktop has the following disadvantages: It does not allow you to change the XML structures graphically. Some users have reported problems with some of the macros used in Tivoli Orchestrator. The following screen capture shows a typical session using the Cooktop XML editor: Figure 4-1 Cooktop XML editor Chapter 4. Creating the demonstration 77
  • 92. This screen capture below shows the XML structure view from Cooktop: Figure 4-2 Cooktop XML structure view 4.1.3 XMLSpy XMLSpy is a licensed product from Altova systems, available at: http://www.altova.com. XMLSpy is available on a 30-day trial basis and requires registration with Altova. The tool provides the following features: It allows the XML files to be created and maintained either graphically or text based. It displays XML with color coding. It validates the XML against the DTD file. It does not permit invalid items to be inserted. It is possible to cut and paste structures. It is possible to shrink elements that are not being worked on, thus making it easier to see the current items. XMLSpy does have the following limitations: Using the graphical editor can be quite daunting at first and requires a fair bit of practice. It is expensive. 78 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 93. It does have some bugs! The following screen capture shows a typical session using the graphical editor in XMLSpy: Figure 4-3 XMLSpy XML editor 4.2 Designing the data center model This section describes the data center modeling process. 4.2.1 ITITO GUI method If you choose the GUI method, we recommend that you clean up the ITITO database. It will be necessary to reinitialize the ITITO database with a blank DCM. This is best achieved by following these steps: 1. Edit the reinit-exec.bat file in c:cygwinhomethinkcontroltools. Chapter 4. Creating the demonstration 79
  • 94. 2. In the reinit-exec.bat file, comment out the line that contains the following with a REM statement: set DCMCFG_FILE=example.xml 3. Open a command prompt. 4. Run the batch file: toolsreinit.bat When this completes, the ITITO database will be completely cleared. The advantages of the GUI are as follows: It is easy to add components. The GUI provides lists of relevant components in some pull-down menus. It is not possible to insert incorrect objects. It can be quite quick for a small system. The disadvantages of the GUI are as follows: It is not currently possible to export the data into an XML format and then reuse it in another system. If the ITITO system is reinitialized, all work is lost. It can be very tedious to add a large number of objects using the GUI. It can be prone to errors if a lot of similar objects are added. No specific instructions are provided in this document to guide the reader in creating a data center model using the GUI. It is assumed that the reader will be familiar with the ITITO GUI and will understand how to use it to create the data center components from the data collected. Details can be found in the redbook Provisioning On Demand: Introducing IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator, SG24-8888. 4.2.2 The XML method The ITITO data center model consists of one XML file that contains a number of different elements and attributes. Each element has a specific set of child elements or attributes according to the design schema, also known as the DTD file. For ITITO, the basic data center model file has the following requirements. The minimum form of the XML file consists of a DOCTYPE element and a datacenter element. The datacenter element, however, is not valid without at least one valid child element. In this example, the child element is the switch-fabric element with a name Default, as shown here: 80 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 95. <?xml version="1.0" encoding="ISO-8859-1"?> <!-- edited with XMLSPY v2004 rel. 2 U (http://www.xmlspy.com) by Tony French (IBM UK Ltd) --> <!-- DCM: Empty Author: A N Other Info: This DCM is totally empty awaiting customization --> <!DOCTYPE datacenter SYSTEM "xmlimport.dtd"> <datacenter> <switch-fabric name="Default"/> </datacenter> All other elements must be placed between the <datacenter> begin and </datacenter> end tags. This example will initialize the ITITO data center model with nothing but a switch fabric called Default. 4.2.3 DOCTYPE element Within the DOCTYPE element, it is possible to code reusable segments of XML (entities) that are included in elements defined later. For the demonstration, the following entities should be included in the !DOCTYPE definition: <!ENTITY workload-cluster SYSTEM "workload-cluster.xml"> <!ENTITY resourcepoolconfig SYSTEM "resourcepool.xml"> <!ENTITY dataacquisitionconfig SYSTEM "dataacquisition.xml"> <!ENTITY simulator-cpu ' <dae-driver device="server" classname="com.thinkdynamics.kanaha.dataacquisitionengine.NullDriver"> </dae-driver> <dae-signal name="cpu-utilization" device="server" metric="cpu-utilization" aggregation="average" filter="low-pass-filter"> </dae-signal> '> <!ENTITY simulator-arrival-rate ' <dae-driver device="load-balancer" classname="com.thinkdynamics.kanaha.dataacquisitionengine.NullDriver"> </dae-driver> <dae-signal name="arrival-rate" device="load-balancer" metric="arrival-rate" aggregation="any" filter="low-pass-filter"> </dae-signal> <dae-signal name="raw-arrival-rate" device="load-balancer" metric="arrival-rate" aggregation="any"> </dae-signal> Chapter 4. Creating the demonstration 81
  • 96. '> <!ENTITY null-load-balancer-dae ' <dae-driver device="load-balancer" classname="com.thinkdynamics.kanaha.dataacquisitionengine.ZeroValueDriver"> </dae-driver> <dae-signal name="arrival-rate" device="load-balancer" metric="arrival-rate" aggregation="any" filter="low-pass-filter"> </dae-signal> <dae-signal name="raw-arrival-rate" device="load-balancer" metric="arrival-rate" aggregation="any" filter="low-pass-filter"> </dae-signal> ’> Essentially, these entities are instructions to the simulator and provide information about how the data is acquired and delivered to the various components. 4.2.4 Power supplies If power supplies are required, these can be included simply by including a power-unit element with the name of the power unit and the device model, as shown in the following example: <power-unit name="Power Unit 1" is-device-model="APC-7901-SNMP"> </power-unit> 4.2.5 Network components The network components in ITITO consist of the following elements: Switch fabric Subnetworks Switches Routers and firewalls Load balancers (variety of switch) Access control lists (ACLs) Switch fabric The switch fabric element in ITITO is just a name to which other elements refer. Multiple switch fabrics can be defined if required. For demonstrations, it is recommended that only one be used. The customer’s name can be used if required, as shown in the following example: <switch-fabric name="Customer Network"> </switch-fabric> 82 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 97. Subnetworks Each subnetwork identified in “Subnetworks” on page 9 should be entered using the subnetwork element together with the VLAN and switch fabric name, as shown in the following example: <subnetwork ipaddress="192.168.1.0" netmask="255.255.255.0"> <vlan vlan-number="101" fabric="Customer Network"/> </vlan> </subnetwork> We recommend that you define all of the subnetworks in one group at this point in the XML file to aid in locating them when the data center model grows. In addition, it is a good idea to define the subnetwork of the ITITO server. For the demonstration system (discussed in Chapter 5, “Demonstration” on page 107) the ITITO server is on an IP address of 192.168.192.168, so there should be an additional subnet defined as follows: <subnetwork ipaddress="192.168.192.0" netmask="255.255.255.0"> <vlan vlan-number="192" fabric="Customer Network"> </vlan> </subnetwork> Switches Every switch, switch module, and switch port identified in “Switches” on page 10 should be defined in the data center model using the switch element, as shown in the following example: <switch name="Switch 1" is-device-model="Dummy Switch" fabric="Customer Network" ipaddress="192.168.1.253"> <switch-module name="fa0"> <switch-port vlan="101" port-number="1" layer1-interface-type="FastEthernet"> </switch-port> <switch-port vlan="101" port-number="2" layer1-interface-type="FastEthernet"> </switch-port> <switch-port vlan="101" port-number="3" layer1-interface-type="FastEthernet"> </switch-port> <switch-port vlan="101" port-number="4" layer1-interface-type="FastEthernet"> </switch-port> <switch-port vlan="192" port-number="5" layer1-interface-type="FastEthernet"> </switch-port> <switch-port vlan="101" port-number="6" layer1-interface-type="FastEthernet"> </switch-port> Chapter 4. Creating the demonstration 83
  • 98. <switch-port vlan="101" port-number="7" layer1-interface-type="FastEthernet"> </switch-port> <switch-port vlan="101" port-number="11" layer1-interface-type="FastEthernet"> </switch-port> <switch-port vlan="101" port-number="12" layer1-interface-type="FastEthernet"> </switch-port> <switch-port vlan="102" port-number="13" layer1-interface-type="FastEthernet"> </switch-port> <switch-port vlan="102" port-number="14" layer1-interface-type="FastEthernet"> </switch-port> <switch-port vlan="103" port-number="15" layer1-interface-type="FastEthernet"> </switch-port> <switch-port vlan="103" port-number="16" layer1-interface-type="FastEthernet"> </switch-port> </switch-module> <power-outlet power-unit="Power Unit 1" outlet-number="1"> </power-outlet> </switch> Note: For this switch, there is a reference to a power unit. If power units are not required, this can be omitted. We recommend that you define all of the switches in one group for clarity. Routers and firewalls In ITITO routers and firewalls are types of switches. Each router and firewall identified in “Routers and firewalls” on page 11 should be defined using the switch element and a number of network-interface child elements. Firewalls should be identified with the firewall element, which takes no parameters. In this example, the network interface contains a reference to an access control list that is defined later. <switch name="Router 1" is-device-model="Dummy Switch" fabric="Customer Network"> <network-interface name="Management" ipaddress="192.168.1.254" managed="false"> <route subnetwork="192.168.2.0" gateway="192.168.1.254"> </route> <route subnetwork="192.168.3.0" gateway="192.168.1.254"> </route> <acl-ref type="1" name="ACL-1" enabled="true"> </acl-ref> 84 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 99. </network-interface> <network-interface name="TIO" ipaddress="192.168.192.254" managed="false"> <route subnetwork="192.168.1.0" gateway="192.168.192.254"> </route> <acl-ref type="1" name="ACL-2" enabled="true"> </acl-ref> </network-interface> <firewall/> <power-outlet power-unit="Power Unit 1" outlet-number="2"> </power-outlet> </switch> Access control lists (ACLs) Each ACL identified in “Access control lists” on page 12 should be defined using the acl element, as shown in the following example: <acl name="ACL-1"> <rule position="1" target="permit" source-subnet="192.168.1.0" destination-subnet="192.168.2.0"> </rule> <rule position="2" target="permit" source-subnet="192.168.2.0" destination-subnet="192.168.1.0"> </rule> </acl> For the purposes of a demonstration, it will probably not be necessary to define the ports used by each ACL. Load balancers Load balancers are defined with the load-balancer element. The following example shows the definition of a dummy load balancer to be used for demonstration purposes only: <load-balancer name="Load Balancer 1" is-device-model="Dummy LB" type="arrowpoint-load-balancer" ipaddress="192.168.1.252"> </load-balancer> Virtual IPs Each virtual IP name used by the load balancers should be defined using the virtual-ip address, as shown in this example: <virtual-ip name="Web Sales" load-balancer="Load Balancer 1" virtual-ip-address="192.168.1.250" in-tcp-port-first="80" in-tcp-port-last="80" out-tcp-port="80"/> </virtual-ip> Chapter 4. Creating the demonstration 85
  • 100. Each cluster that is to demonstrate automatic provisioning should reference a virtual IP, so ensure that one is defined for each of these clusters. 4.2.6 Software The three categories of software (software package, software patch, and software stack identified in 2.3.3, “Software” on page 14 are defined, as shown in the following examples. Software package Software packages are defined with the software element type, for example: <software name="Windows 2000" version="2000" package_path="d:repositoryWin2000" type="OPERATING_SYSTEM" install_path="c:winnt"> </software> Software patch Any software patches required can be defined using the software-patch element: <software-patch name="Windows 2000 Service Pack 4" package_path="c:" reboot="true"> </software-patch> Software stack Finally, software packages and software patches are grouped into software stacks using a combination of the software-stack and software-stack-product elements, as shown in this example: <software-stack name="Windows 2000 Server"> <software-stack-product product-name="Windows 2000" position="1" expected-state="running"> </software-stack-product> <software-stack-product product-name="Windows 2000 Service Pack 4" position="2" expected-state="running"/> </software-stack-product> </software-stack> 4.2.7 Spare pools Each collection of spare similar servers identified in 2.3.4, “Spare pools” on page 16 should be defined by the spare-pool element containing a number of server elements, in turn, containing NIC and network-interface elements. 86 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 101. Note: For these servers, it is usually a good idea to have multiple network interface cards at least one of which is reserved for managing the server and is marked as not managed by ITITO. Other network cards can be set to managed, which will allow ITITO to assign change and remove IP addresses (network interfaces) when required. Obviously, if all the network interface cards are set to managed, ITITO could attempt to change the IP address of the network interface it is using to communicate with the server with unpredictable results! <spare-pool name="Intel Pool" os-type="" vlan="101" fabric="Customer Network"> <server name="x330-1"> <nic managed="false" connected-to-switch="Switch 1" connected-to-module="fa0" connected-to-port="1"> <network-interface name="Management" ipaddress="192.168.1.3" managed="false"/> </network-interface> </nic> <nic managed="true" connected-to-switch="Switch 1" connected-to-module="fa0" connected-to-ort="11"> </nic> </server> </spare-pool> ITITO requires that the ITITO servers are defined to the system and placed in a resource pool. For this demonstration, it is not strictly necessary, but it is worthwhile showing this by including the following resource pool definition: <spare-pool name="TIO Server" os-type="" vlan="192" fabric="Customer Network"> <server name="wink"> <nic managed="false" connected-to-switch="Switch 1" connected-to-module="fa0" connected-to-port="5"> <network-interface managed="false" ipaddress="192.168.192.168"/> </nic> </server> </spare-pool> 4.2.8 ITITO configuration There are a number of general settings for ITITO that control the operation of the whole system that need to be defined in the data center model. These settings include global parameters, data acquisition parameters, and also the inclusion of macros for certain components. Chapter 4. Creating the demonstration 87
  • 102. These configuration parameters are defined with the kanaha-config element that has a single child element of dcm-object. One of the most important elements that should be created under the dcm-object element is a properties element with the ID of 0. This element contains the global variables for the whole system including items such as the operations mode, the default source host and directory for software packages, and the temporary path. For a demonstration, the actual locations of the software packages are not important, but can be useful to show the customer where these values are defined. Some parameters available include: Table 4-1 Deployment engine global variables Component Name Value (with samples) RESOURCE_BROKER OperationsMode-current manual DEPLOYMENT_ENGINE PackageUtilPath /opt/zip DEPLOYMENT_ENGINE PackageScriptPath /home/thinkcontrol/script DEPLOYMENT_ENGINE PackageTempFilePath /tmp DEPLOYMENT_ENGINE PackageIntermediateHost 192.168.1.200 DEPLOYMENT_ENGINE PackageRepositoryHost 192.168.1.200 DEPLOYMENT_ENGINE PackageRepositoryDir /usr/local/kanaha/upload DEPLOYMENT_ENGINE PackageWebHost 192.168.1.200 DEPLOYMENT_ENGINE PackageWebDir /usr/local/kanaha/apps The following example shows a typical kanaha-config element that we recommend you load in the demonstration data center model: <kanaha-config> <dcm-object id="0"> <property component="RESOURCE_BROKER" name="OperationsMode-current" value="manual"> </property> <property component="APPLICATION_CONTROLLER" name="predictor-prediction-interval-msec" value="900001"> </property> <property component="APPLICATION_CONTROLLER" name="predictor-type.1.class" value="com.thinkdynamics.kanaha.controller.appcontroller.predictor.DefaultP redictor"> </property> <property component="APPLICATION_CONTROLLER" 88 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 103. name="predictor-type.1.enable" value="true"> </property> <property component="APPLICATION_CONTROLLER" name="predictor-type.2.class" value="com.thinkdynamics.kanaha.controller.appcontroller.predictor.LinearTr endPredictor"> </property> <property component="APPLICATION_CONTROLLER" name="predictor-type.2.enable" value="false"> </property> <property component="APPLICATION_CONTROLLER" name="predictor-type.3.class" value="com.thinkdynamics.kanaha.controller.appcontroller.predictor.OneDayPr edictor"> </property> <property component="APPLICATION_CONTROLLER" name="predictor-type.3.enable" value="false"> </property> <property component="APPLICATION_CONTROLLER" name="predictor-type.4.class" value="com.thinkdynamics.kanaha.controller.appcontroller.predictor.OneWeekP redictor"> </property> <property component="APPLICATION_CONTROLLER" name="predictor-type.4.enable" value="false"> </property> <property component="DEPLOYMENT_ENGINE" name="PackageUtilPath" value="/opt/zip"> </property> <property component="DEPLOYMENT_ENGINE" name="PackageScriptPath" value="/home/thinkcontrol/script"> </property> <property component="DEPLOYMENT_ENGINE" name="PackageTempFilePath" value="/tmp"> </property> <property component="DEPLOYMENT_ENGINE" name="PackageIntermediateHost" value="192.168.1.200"> </property> <property component="DEPLOYMENT_ENGINE" name="PackageRepositoryHost" value="192.168.1.200"> </property> <property component="DEPLOYMENT_ENGINE" name="PackageRepositoryDir" value="/usr/local/kanaha/upload"> </property> <property component="DEPLOYMENT_ENGINE" name="PackageWebHost" value="192.168.1.200"> </property> <property component="DEPLOYMENT_ENGINE" name="PackageWebDir" value="/usr/local/kanaha/apps"> Chapter 4. Creating the demonstration 89
  • 104. </property> &resourcepoolconfig; &dataacquisitionconfig; </dcm-object> </kanaha-config> The first parameter listed here is the global operations mode of the ITITO system. In this case, it is set to manual, although it could be set to automatic if required. For a demonstration, it might be advisable to start the demonstration in manual mode and then to switch to automatic using the GUI after the basic principles have been shown. This will be explained more in the next chapter. 4.2.9 Customers Each customer, application, cluster, and dedicated server identified in 2.3.5, “Applications and customers” on page 16 must be defined using the customer, application, cluster, and server elements that must be defined in the corresponding hierarchy. The following example shows a single server for one cluster in an application for one customer: <customer name="Customer"> <application name="Internet Sales" priority="1"> <cluster name="Sales Web Servers" min-servers="1" max-servers="5" vlan="102" fabric="Customer Network" pool="Intel Pool" managed="true" is-device-model="Simulator" virtual-ipaddress="Sales Web"> <with-load-balancer name="Load Balancer 1"/> <server name="SalesWebSrv01"> <nic connected-to-switch="Switch 1" connected-to-module="fa0" connected-to-port="13" managed="false"> <network-interface name="Local Area Connection" ipaddress="192.168.2.3"/> </network> </nic> </server> </cluster> </application> </customer> Note: The virtual IP address is set for this cluster. This is important for the simulator to be able to provision servers automatically. 90 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 105. 4.3 Sample XML files Included with this document are some sample XML files that can be used as a reference or to help the reader get started. Two examples are available: The Cookbook example, from which the segments in the previous section were taken. The XML file used in Provisioning On Demand: Introducing IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator, SG24-8888. Both examples have corresponding simulator definitions. In addition, the demonstration system itself contains a data center model and simulator parameters for the U.S. open environment. 4.3.1 Cookbook example DCM The example that provided the fragments of XML in the previous section is based on the following physical design of a data center. See Figure 4-4 on page 92. In this data center, there are two applications: Human Resources and Internet Sales. Each is a two-tier application with a Web server tier and a database tier. The Web servers of each use Intel machines and Microsoft IIS, but the database servers use SQL server on Intel and DB2 on AIX, respectively. Each tier/cluster has one dedicated server, that is, a server that is not under ITITO control. The SQL server machine is not to take part in automatic provisioning. The production servers are all attached to switch Prod-SW-1 and have dedicated VLANs. The load balancer Load Balancer 1 balances the workload. There is a pool of eight Intel machines with dual network cards. One card is attached to the production network switch, and the other is attached to a management LAN using Switch 1. There is also a pool of one RS/6000® machine that is similarly attached and can be used to provide some relief to the Human Resources database when required. All the spare pools are in VLAN 101. The ITITO server is attached to the management LAN, but has its own VLAN. Finally, traffic is routed between all the VLANs by the router Router 1. This XML can be found in the file Demo-Cookbook.xml. The simulator parameters can be found in the file: Demo-Cookbook-tdnetwork.xml Chapter 4. Creating the demonstration 91
  • 106. Figure 4-4 Sample network infrastructure 4.3.2 Redbook example Full details of the redbook example can be found in Provisioning On Demand: Introducing IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator, SG24-8888. The data center model for the redbook has been modified to use the simulator rather than the real servers and load balancers. The redbook data center model can be found in the file Redbook-simulator.xml. 92 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 107. The simulator parameters for the redbook example can be found in the file Redbook-tdnetworks.xml. 4.4 Loading the data center model The XML data center model must be placed in the cygwinhomethinkcontrolxml folder, although the actual name of the file is unimportant. To load the XML file and reinitialize the database it is necessary to do the following: 1. Edit the file reinit-exec.bat in cygwinhomethinkcontroltools. 2. Change the line that contains set DCMCFG_FILE=example.xml in the reinit-exec.bat file so that the new XML file is specified, for example: set DCMCFG_FILE=Demo-Cookbook.xml 3. Open a command window. 4. Make sure the directory is homethinkcontrol. 5. Run the command toolsreinit.bat. Note: Be patient! This process can take 30-45 minutes, depending on the hardware used to support the environment. To follow the progress, you can open a new command window and enter the following command in order to see the entries put into the log file: tail –f %tc_home%logsreinit.log After no new lines are added, the process has completed. If this command returns with no Java errors, the data center model has loaded successfully, and ITITO can now be started. If any errors have been identified, it is necessary to debug these and reinitialize the database before proceeding. It can be quite tricky to determine the nature of any loading errors. The best method consists of locating the type of element in which the error has occurred. This is much easier if all the elements are grouped together as recommended. Typical errors include: Referring to a non-existing element. Missing attributes for an element. Specifying an incorrect format for an IP address. Specifying an alphanumeric character where a numeric is expected. Specifying a device driver that does not exist. Chapter 4. Creating the demonstration 93
  • 108. As a last resort, it might be necessary to remove elements of the XML file and reload to determine which parts are not correct. If problems are experienced, it is sometimes helpful to build each section of the XML file in turn. If you follow this order, referential errors can be avoided: 1. Configure the XML file with power supplied only. 2. Add the network components: a. Add subnetworks. b. Add switches. c. Add ACLs. d. Add routers, firewalls, and load balancers. e. Add virtual IPs. 3. Add the software configuration. 4. Add any miscellaneous components: a. Add terminal servers. b. Add blade center management servers. c. Add boot servers. 5. Add the spare pools. 6. Add the ITITO configuration. 7. Finally, add the customer configuration. 4.4.1 Tip for creating XML files using text editors If a text editor is used to build the XML file, it can get rather large and unwieldy. One method of coping with this is to create separate files for each component type and then to assemble them prior to loading. For example, a number of files are available: Header section in the 1-Header.xmf file. Power supply section in the 2-power-units.xmf file. Networks section in the 3-Networks.xmf file. Software, software stack, and software patch in the 4-software.xmf file. Boot server definition. A Rembo server example is provided in the 5-bootserver.xmf file. Resource pools in the 6-pools.xmf file. ITITO variables in the 7-configvariables.xmf file. Customer definition in the 8-customer.xmf file. Terminal server, blade server, and so on in the 9-other.xmf file. 94 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 109. Finally, the datacenter terminator tag in the 10-trailer.xmf file. Note: The extension .xmf is used here to distinguish the files from XML files and means an XML fragment. It will then be possible to concatenate the files together (in the right order, from 1 to 10) into an XML file with the following command: Cat xmf_file >> DCM-file.xml Where, xmf_file is the fragment file described above. The XML file can then be loaded as before. Furthermore, it is a good idea to have separate files for each type of component as long as they have the correct prefix, for example, 5-SparePool-Intel.xmf, 5-SparePool-Linux.xmf, or 5-SparePool-AIX.xmf. 4.5 Configuring the simulator The ITITO simulator is configured using a number of parameters in the data center model and also in the tdnetwork.xml file in the /cygwin/home/thinkcontrol/config folder. 4.5.1 Data center model Each cluster that takes part in the simulation must have the source of the data acquisition data defined and a simulation workload model associated with this source. The data acquisition properties are defined in the XML data center model, and the simulation workload model is defined in the tdnetwork.xml file. For the purposes of a demonstration, each cluster requires a dcm-object element to be defined as follows within the kanaha-config element: <dcm-object type="cluster" name="Sales Web Servers"> &workload-cluster; <data-acquisition> &simulator-cpu; &simulator-arrival-rate; </data-acquisition> </dcm-object> In this case, the texts &workload-cluster;, &simulator-cpu;, and &simulator-arrival-rate; refer to entities defined in the DOCTYPE element and Chapter 4. Creating the demonstration 95
  • 110. essentially are variable names that refer to macros. If the XML file is viewed with a Web browser, it can be seen that the variable name is replaced with the full definition from the DOCTYPE element. It is also possible to define these data acquisition properties within each cluster, but we recommend for simplicity in defining demonstrations that they are just defined in the kanaha-config element. 4.5.2 The tdnetworks file The tdnetworks file consists of three main sections under the simulator element: Cluster-type Schedule Application traffic functions The simulator element contains the enable attribute that allows the simulator to be running at startup or stopped. The tdnetworks cluster type element The cluster-type element allows for different scaling factors to be applied to the traffic functions by particular types of cluster. However, it appears that in the Version 1.1 of ITITO that only one type of cluster is supported: UNKNOWN. This element is used to set the arrival rate, CPU utilization, and response times for the cluster type. In ITITO V1.1, the response times are not used, so they can be ignored. The CPU utilization parameter sets the percent of CPU used by a single transaction and the constant CPU percent. These parameters are specified as fractions of 1. The tdnetworks schedule element The schedule element controls startup and the sampling interval of the simulator. This element has two attributes expressed in milliseconds: Startup-delay Iteration The tdnetworks application traffic element Finally, the application traffic function allows a simulated workload to be applied to each cluster by using various functions; it is possible to increase or decrease the workload in smooth ramps or steps using the various parameters available. 96 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 111. The simulator provides two functions for simulating a workload: a step function and a ramp function. The step function simulates a constant workload for a specified duration, and the ramp function simulates a rising or falling workload from an initial position. The step function requires the following parameters: Duration (in milliseconds) Amplitude (expressed as a percentage of the max_amplitude defined for the application) The ramp function requires the following parameters: Slope (expressed as a ratio of transactions/millisecond, for example, 45 degrees upwards = 1, and 45 degrees downwards = -1) Duration (in milliseconds) Initial value (expressed as a percentage of the max) Important: For a demonstration of automatic provisioning, it will be necessary to define a workload for each of the customer’s applications. Note that the workload is set at the application level and not cluster. If the customer is able to provide a graph of a typical workload for each application, this could be used to build the simulator functions. For example, the following graph might represent two typical workloads: An office environment where there is little work before 9:00 a.m., then as staff come into work, the workload increases until lunch when it dips down until the afternoon before tailing off for the evening. A Web environment where there are a number of users before 9:00 a.m., then as the users go into work, the workload drops until lunch when some users might log on again before going back to work in the afternoon until the evening then there is a steady workload. In this example, surprisingly nobody is using the Internet application in the afternoon! Chapter 4. Creating the demonstration 97
  • 112. Workload 1200 1000 800 Workload % Office workload 600 Internet workload 400 200 0 00 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 6: 8: 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 Time Figure 4-5 Workload during the day When looking at the workload depicted above, it is obvious that the representation is focused on the relative amount of work that needs to be performed, not on any actual numbers. When trying to simulate this workload, we need to establish some point of reference by which we can quantify the amount of work. For example, does 100% workload mean 5 or 1000000 simultaneous transactions? For the purpose of the discussion, we assume in the following that 100% workload is achieved at 1000 simultaneous transactions. Now, with a proper reference point to set the scales of the above chart, we also need to know how much one transaction loads a system in our configuration. The correlation between a transaction and cpu-load allows us to translate workload into processing need, and thus simulate CPU usage and allocation of servers. For the sake of the discussion, let us assume that one transaction generates 5% load on a system. Here, we do not distinguish between different types of systems, because all the systems that will be allocated to support a workload will have similar configurations, and thus the use of a general number for load per transaction will not influence the calculations. 98 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 113. The simulator functions required to simulate the above office workload are as follows: Table 4-2 Simulator functions for the sample Office workload Function Slope Duration Initial value Amplitude StepFunction 12000 20 RampFunction 6000 20 StepFunction 12000 100 RampFunction -1 6000 100 StepFunction 12000 100 RampFunction 6000 50 StepFunction 12000 100 RampFunction 6000 100 StepFunction 30000 20 The simulator functions that represent the above Internet workload are as follows: Table 4-3 Simulator functions for the sample Office workload Function Slope Duration Initial value Amplitude StepFunction 18000 75 RampFunction -1 6000 75 StepFunction 6000 25 RampFunction 6000 25 StepFunction 12000 100 RampFunction -3 6000 100 StepFunction 12000 0 RampFunction 6000 StepFunction 12000 100 RampFunction -1 6000 100 StepFunction 12000 75 Chapter 4. Creating the demonstration 99
  • 114. Calculating the number of systems Knowing the workload over time as a percentage of the total workload, unfortunately, does not indicate how many transactions are being initiated or how much computing power is required to support the workload. To deduce the number of servers required running the workload, we have to look at the cluster_type properties again and combine these with our workload numbers. From the cluster_type element, the value for the scale property tells us how much cpu-load each transaction generates and the value for the constant property indicates what the system overhead, or idle load, is. For a max_amplitude of an application of 1000000 and a scale of 0.05, we can deduct that the total requirement for CPU at 75% workload is: 75%*1000000 transactions *0.05 %cpu/transaction = 37500 %cpu = 375 cpus This almost translates to a requirement for 375 servers each using all their capacity to support our workload. When calculating the required servers, we have to adjust this number to account for the fact that each system cannot provide 100% CPU to support the workload. First of all, the system needs a few cycles for system overhead, which is represented by the constant property of the cpu_utilization parameter of the cluster_type entry. In the following, we assume that the value for constant is 0.01. In addition, the systems are never fully 100 percent committed to specific workload. From the Service Level Objective specified for the application, Platinum, Gold, or Silver, we know that more resources will be allocated to the application clusters when the average CPR utilization reaches a predefined cut_off value. The default values are 75%, 80%, and 90%, respectively. This implies that for an application with a Silver SLA, new systems are allocated when the average CPU load reaches 90%. Taking the idle load into account, we realize that the fraction of each system that will be used to execute our workload is: Effective_CPU = Cut_off – constant For a Silver application with a constant of 0.01, the effective_CPU will be: Effective_CPU = 0.90 – 0.01 = 0.89 Therefore, to adjust the calculation of needed required servers to account for these factors, the formula for the total number of required servers for to support a workload is: Workload% * ( max_amplitude * scale) / (cut_off – constant) Using the numbers in our example, we get: 75% * (1000000 * 0.05)/100*(0.90 – 0.01) = 422 servers 4.5.2.3.2 Calculating the RampFunction slope 100 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 115. As seen above, when working with RampFunctions you have to specify the starting point, in terms of the percent fraction of the max_amplitude, and a slope to describe the curve. This can seem somewhat awkward compared to specifying starting and ending workload percentages, so in the following example, we demonstrate how to calculate slope based on pure workload data. As described earlier, the slope is a number indicating the growth (or decline) of transactions per time unit, and you might remember that the amplitudes denote fractions (in percent) of the max_amplitude defined for an application. Combining this information you can deduct that the slope, in terms of transaction increase or decrease over time, can be calculated as follows: Slope = (Max_amplitude * (Ending_amplitude – Starting-amplitude)/100) / duration Please note that the starting_amplitude is also known as initial_value. To deduct the amplitudes, as percentages of max_amplitude, we have to involve the scale attribute of the cpu_utilization parameter of the cluster_type entry. The scale specifies how much one transaction loads a system. Combining this information with the amplitudes allows us to work with CPU load instead of slopes. Assuming the following: Scale = 0.05 (5% cpu load for each transaction) Max_amplitude = 100000 Initial_value= 23% cpu Duration= 60000 milliseconds (one minute) Desired ending amplitude = 75% We can calculate the slope as follows: Workload_growth (ending_load – starting_load) = 75%-23% = 52% Growth in transactions: workload_growth *max_amplitude = 0.52*1000000 = 520000 transactions slope = transactions / duration520000/60000 = 8.6667 Now that we know how much the workload increases over time, we can calculate the number of additional servers needed to support this load: Growth in CPU demand: growth in transactions*scale = 520000*0.05 = 26000 %cpu Growth # of servers = Growth in CPU demand/100*(cut_off– constant) = 26000/(0.90-0.01)*100 = 293 servers To determine the amount of servers needed to support this resulting workload, we see: Chapter 4. Creating the demonstration 101
  • 116. Ending server demand_ = (starting load*max_amplitude + slope*duration)*scale/(cut_off – constant) = (0.23*1000000 + 8.6667*60000) * 0.05/(0.90 – 0.01)*100 = 422 servers Note: To ease the calculations of workload and the required number of servers to sustain this, we have provided a small, self-explaining spreadsheet to help you. The simulator parameters, which can be found in the provided Demo-Cookbook-tdnetwork.xml, needed to generate a workload for two applications, Human Resources and Internet Sales of our Demo-Cookbook (Demo-Cookbook.xml) DCM, are as follows: <?xml version="1.0"?> <!-- edited with XMLSPY v2004 rel. 2 U (http://www.xmlspy.com) by Tony French (IBM UK Ltd) --> <td_network> <Version>0.80-032001</Version> <simulator enable="true"> <cluster-type name="UNKNOWN"> <!--These parameters define a CPU utilization per transaction of 5%. There is a constant overhead of 1% s for the transaction. Each transaction can only cause a maximum cpu load of 100%. The response time values are not used.--> <simulation-parameters name="arrival-rate" noise-scale="0.0" output-ratio="0.25"> </simulation-parameters> <simulation-parameters name="cpu-utilization" scale="0.05" constant="0.01" max="1"> </simulation-parameters> <simulation-parameters name="response-time" scale="1.0" constant="77.0" max="100"> </simulation-parameters> </cluster-type> <!-- sets the DAE polling period (in milliseconds) for all simulated clusters. --> <schedule startup-delay="5000" iteration-period="20000"> <!--The parameters here specify that the simulator will only start processing 5 secs after it starts and poll for new data every 20 secs--> </schedule> <application_traffic_functions> <!--Each Application requires a workload model--> <!--Slope is the ratio of the height of the slope over the length of the slope. Hence 1 = 45 degrees --> <app_function app_name="Human Resources" max_amplitude="1000000"> <!--This Application has a workload model that resembles the typical daytime office hours workload. I.e a peak at 9:am steady workload until 102 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 117. 12:00 a drop until 2 and a peak until 5pm and not much overnight.--> <function function_type="StepFunction" duration="12000" amplitude="20"> </function> <function function_type="RampFunction" slope="2" duration="6000" init_value="20" amplitude="100"> </function> <function function_type="StepFunction" duration="12000" amplitude="100"> </function> <function function_type="RampFunction" slope="-1" duration="6000" init_value="100" amplitude="50"> </function> <function function_type="StepFunction" duration="12000" amplitude="50"> </function> <function function_type="RampFunction" slope="1" duration="6000" init_value="50" amplitude="100"> </function> <function function_type="StepFunction" duration="12000" amplitude="100"> </function> <function function_type="RampFunction" slope="-2" duration="6000" init_value="100" amplitude="20"> </function> <function function_type="StepFunction" duration="30000" amplitude="0"/> </app_function> <app_function app_name="Internet Sales" max_amplitude="1000000"> <!--This workload is intended to represent web traffic that is at 75% overnight, tails off during the morning, Hits Max at lunchtime 75% in the afternoon, Peak in the evening and back to 75% late evening--> <function function_type="StepFunction" duration="18000" amplitude="75"> </function> <function function_type="RampFunction" slope="-1" duration="60000" init_value="75" amplitude=""> </function> <function function_type="StepFunction" duration="60000" amplitude="25"> </function> <function function_type="RampFunction" slope="2" duration="60000" init_value="25" amplitude=""> </function> <function function_type="StepFunction" duration="12000" amplitude="100"> </function> <function function_type="RampFunction" slope="-3" duration="6000" init_value="100"> </function> <function function_type="StepFunction" duration="12000" amplitude="0"> </function> <function function_type="RampFunction" slope="3" duration="6000" init_value="0" amplitude=""> Chapter 4. Creating the demonstration 103
  • 118. </function> <function function_type="StepFunction" duration="12000" amplitude="100"> </function> <function function_type="RampFunction" slope="-1" duration="6000" init_value="100" amplitude=""> </function> <function function_type="StepFunction" duration="12000" amplitude="75"> </function> </app_function> </application_traffic_functions> </simulator> </td_network> Simulating multiple workloads When using the simulator to demonstrate multiple workloads orchestrated simultaneously by ITITO, you should be aware of the limitation in the current release, which only allows for the UNKNOWN cluster_type entry. The effect of not being able to specify multiple cluster_types forces you to use the same value for the constant property (the system overhead) for all applications, no matter which platforms are used to support the application-specific workload. This can be regarded as a small inconvenience, which can be overcome by defining the smallest value for the constant property and adding extra transactions to selected workloads to simulate extra idle load. Assuming that you have three workloads running on three different platforms with the current characteristics: App1 real_scale=0.05 idle_load=0.01 real_max_amplitude=1000 App2 real_scale=0.01 idle_load=0.05 real_max_amplitude=10000 App3 real_scale=0.02 idle_load=0.03 real_max_amplitude=500 You would specify the lowest of the three idle_load values (0.001, the one from App1) as the value for the constant property of the Unknown cluster_type definition. To signal to the simulator that the idle_load in fact is higher than 1% for App2 and App3, you have to increase all workload percentages to take the higher idle_load into account. The increase must match the missing idle_load in terms of %cpu, so for each application, you have to add (idle_load –constant)*max_amplitude*scale percent workload for each value for initial_value and amplitude in the application_load statements. For App2, the value will be (0.05 – 0.01)* 10000*0.01 = 4% or 0.04. For App3, the increase is (0.03 – 0.01)*500*0.02 = 0.2% or 0.002. The limitation of supported cluster_type entries in the current implementation of ITITO also applies to the value for the scale property. It is highly unlikely that all application transactions load the supporting platforms equally. Therefore, 104 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 119. because you can only specify one value the scale property, you must specify the lowest one of the applications you will be simulating, and adjust the max-amplitude for the other applications accordingly. In our example, we would specify a common value for scale of 0.01, which comes from App2. Using this value for all the applications, the simulated workload for App1 would be one fifth of the anticipated workload and half of the anticipated workload for App3. Because all workloads are specified as percentages of the max_amplitude, all we need to do to compensate for the lower scale is to multiply the real_max_amplitude for App1 and App3 by a factor of (real_scale/scale), which is 5 and 2, respectively, for the two applications in question. 4.6 Testing Before demonstrating the system to the customer, it should be adequately tested, and ideally, a complete walk through of the demonstration should be performed first. Ensure that the following key areas are working: The GUI loads and the switch fabric can be opened. The icon view of the switch fabric is available. Drill down to a switch to view the ports, and so on. Optionally, use the GUI to turn a switch port on or off. (Only attempt this if the switch has the dummy switch device driver.) Open a resource pool and examine the servers. Make sure that the NICs and interfaces are defined as needed. Open a software package and check its contents. Check that the software package is included in relevant software stacks. Open the customer and make sure that the applications and clusters are defined correctly. Display the server view from a cluster that will use automatic provisioning. Make sure that the simulator is generating a workload for the servers in these clusters. (They will have a bar chart of CPU utilization if it is.) Switch a cluster into manual mode. Add a server to the cluster. Check that the deployment succeeded and that the server was added. Return to the switch fabric view and ensure that the managed port on the server has been moved to a new VLAN. Remove a server from the cluster. Check that it was removed successfully. Chapter 4. Creating the demonstration 105
  • 120. Switch the demonstration to automatic mode. Make sure that servers are added and removed from the application clusters as the workload rises and falls. Select the Overview and make sure that the 3D view is working. 106 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 121. 5 Chapter 5. Demonstration This section explains the main points for demonstrating ITITO and contains the following sections: Introduction to ITITO and the scenario Data center assets and resources Customer applications Real-time performance monitoring © Copyright IBM Corp. 2004. All rights reserved. 107
  • 122. 5.1 Introduction to ITITO and the scenario You should probably start with the presentation with a quick overview of ITITO. You should familiarize the customer with the main capabilities of ITITO, especially the ones you have agreed to demonstrate during the initial interview. The following section has been extracted from Provisioning On Demand: Introducing IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator, SG24-8888. 5.1.1 ITITO: A quick overview The following figure shows a typical example of a data center running three applications, in which one application needs additional resources to attend to user demand, while the other two have enough, or even extra, resources allocated to them. Traditional, manual provisioning practices do not make it practical to move resources from one application to another to meet short-term peaks in demand. Instead, we engage in what we call the just-in-case provisioning cycle: Figure 5-1 Traditional just-in-case provisioning 108 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 123. IBM has changed the provisioning paradigm from just-in-case to just-in-time with IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator by managing resources information and to enhance automation. ITITO dynamically moves computing resources to support the applications with the greater immediate impact on the business just-in-time to meet user demand. Therefore, an organization can reach higher levels of automation and rapidly respond to fluctuating business demands on the IT infrastructure, in line with the overall business goals of the organization. ITITO automates the traditional, manual provisioning process, performance measurement, capacity planning, and infrastructure deployment. ITITO operates in a closed loop that performs automatic resource requirements prediction, based on predefined service level objectives and agreements, and automates infrastructure deployment. This just-in-time cycle ensures that each application has the resource it needs, when it needs it, without static over provisioning. Figure 5-2 Orchestrated Just-in-Time provisioning Although any application can be allocated to any server at any time, a server could be built specifically for an application when it needs it and is subsequently deallocated when it is no longer needed by the application. Chapter 5. Demonstration 109
  • 124. 5.2 Data center assets and resources When the demonstration has been created, it should represent a network configuration that you and the customer have agreed upon. Show the customer the schematic representation of the environment you have created. 5.2.1 Show the switch fabric and inventory resources Select the Data center assets and resources tab –> toggle Inventory –> toggle Switch Fabrics –> select the customer switch fabric you created –> change the view to icon view. You should now have a diagram similar to the following: Figure 5-3 The switch fabric network details - icon view 110 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 125. Click the switch. This will show the customer the VLANs in more detail and which switch ports are connected to the servers: Figure 5-4 Switch network details - icon view You can also drill down to a single server view by selecting any of the servers: Figure 5-5 Server network details - icon view All the resources are listed under the Inventory toggle. Show any resources you think the customer may be interested in seeing. They should all be configured to the requirements agreed upon when setting up the environment. Remember to switch the view back to the details view. 5.2.2 Show the customer the resource pools Select the Data center assets and resources tab -> toggle Resource Pools. Ensure the correct servers are in each pool. Select one of the pools and show the servers. Talk about their current status: If they are brown, they are assigned to a cluster and application, if they are green, they are unassigned, and so forth. The following diagram shows servers in the Intel Pool. For example, x330-2 and x330-7 are assigned to the Sales Web Servers cluster part of the Internet Sales Chapter 5. Demonstration 111
  • 126. application, and x330-4 is assigned to the HR Web Servers cluster part of the Human Resources application. Figure 5-6 Servers in the pre-POC environment 5.3 Customer applications Show the customer the applications that are being provisioned. 1. Select the Customer applications tab -> toggle Customers -> select the customer name. You now see the names of the applications that you have agreed with the customer should be provisioned. 2. Select one of these applications -> select the Clusters tab. You now see the names of the clusters that are part of the application and information about the clusters: 112 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 127. Figure 5-7 Application clusters 3. Select the Servers tab. You now see the names of the servers running the application, the clusters they belong to, and their utilization: Figure 5-8 Active servers for an application 4. Select the Properties tab. You now see the Application Data where you can set SLA levels for the application: Chapter 5. Demonstration 113
  • 128. Figure 5-9 Application service objective details 5. Select one of the application clusters in the left column and select the Info tab. Here, you can see which servers are provisioned for the application and the operating mode of the cluster. This page also shows you which pool the servers are from or that the servers are dedicated to the cluster: Figure 5-10 Active servers in a cluster 6. Change the Operating Mode to manual. 7. Type 1 into the Overflow service box, and select Add. (Set the refresh rate to 10 sec.) This manually provisions a server to this application. You will see a new server from the pool appear in the cluster and the utilization of the other servers reduces: 114 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 129. Figure 5-11 Manually provisioning a server 8. Change the Operating Mode back to automatic before you continue. 9. Select the Deployments tab -> set the Status to all -> select Search. This shows you a history of all the successful and failed deployments of servers to this cluster: Figure 5-12 Server Add workflow transitions Chapter 5. Demonstration 115
  • 130. 5.4 Real-time performance monitoring As long as it has been set up, the simulator changes the utilization of the servers and automatically adds and removes servers from the applications. Servers can also be added manually or semi-automatically. 1. For the servers to automatically be added and removed from applications ensure all the applications are set to automatic mode, as follows. Select the Customer applications tab -> toggle the Customer tag -> select the customer name -> select the application -> set the Operating Mode on the pull-down menu to automatic -> select Change. 2. Now show the overall server utilization and performance as the servers are being added to and removed from applications: Select the Data center assets and resources tab -> toggle Inventory -> select Servers -> on the Servers tab from the top pull-down menus, select All for Cluster and All for Pool -> select Search. You should now have a view similar to the following figure: Figure 5-13 Servers view - provisioning details This view shows you all the servers in your environment, which application/cluster they are assigned to, and to which pool they belong. Watch the server utilization move up and down on the right side. As the utilization increases for an application, you will see extra servers being assigned, and as demand drops, servers being unassigned. 116 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 131. 3. Hover your curser over the server names. This will show you that the servers are in maintenance (red), available (green), assigned (gold), or dedicated (silver). 4. Show the semi-automatic mode. Select one of the applications from the Assigned to field -> select the Clusters tab -> set the Operating Mode to semi-automatic from the pull-down menu -> select Change -> select the Deployment tab -> set the refresh rate to 10 sec -> from the Status pull-down menu, select Waiting for Approval -> select Search. The next time a server needs to be added to the application, an execution request will show on the management GUI, as shown in the following figure: Figure 5-14 Approving an operation in semi-automatic mode If you approve the above request, a server will be removed from the application. To check if the task you have approved has been executed successfully, from the Status pull-down menu, select Deployed -> Search. Chapter 5. Demonstration 117
  • 132. 118 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 133. A Appendix A. Additional material This Redpaper refers to additional material that can be downloaded from the Internet as described below. Locating the Web material The Web material associated with this Redpaper is available in softcopy on the Internet from the IBM Redbooks Web server. Point your Web browser to: ftp://www.redbooks.ibm.com/redbooks/REDP3830 Select the Additional materials and open the directory that corresponds with the Redpaper form number, REDP3830. Using the Web material The additional Web material that accompanies this Redpaper includes the following files: File name Description REDP3830.zip Data center model and workload simulation used during the project. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2004. All rights reserved. 119
  • 134. System requirements for downloading the Web material The following system configuration is recommended: Hard disk space: 1 MB minimum Operating System: Microsoft Windows Processor: any Memory: any How to use the Web material Create a subdirectory (folder) on your workstation, and unzip the contents of the Web material zip file into this folder. 120 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 135. Related publications The publications listed in this section are considered particularly suitable for a more detailed discussion of the topics covered in this Redpaper. IBM Redbooks For information on ordering these publications, see “How to get IBM Redbooks” on page 122. Note that some of these documents referenced here may be available in softcopy only. Provisioning On Demand: Introducing IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator, SG24-8888. IBM Web Infrastructure Orchestration, SG24-7003 Implementing Systems Management Solutions using IBM Director, SG24-6188 WebSphere Edge Server New Features and Functions in Version 2, SG24-6511 Unattended Pristine Installation with IBM Tivoli Configuration Manager, SG24-6627 IBM WebSphere V5.0 for Linux, Implementation and Deployment Guide: WebSphere Handbook Series, REDP-3601 IBM WebSphere V5.0 Performance, Scalability, and High Availability: WebSphere Handbook Series, SG24-6198 Product manuals These publications are also relevant as further information sources: IBM Tivoli Intelligent Orchestrator and Tivoli Provisioning Manager Release Notes, SC32-1422 IBM Tivoli Intelligent Orchestrator and Tivoli Provisioning Manager Operator’s Guide, SC32-1421 IBM Tivoli Intelligent Orchestrator and Tivoli Provisioning Manager Installation Guide, SC32-1420 © Copyright IBM Corp. 2004. All rights reserved. 121
  • 136. IBM Tivoli Provisioning Manager and Intelligent Orchestrator Overview Guide, SC32-1419 Online resources These Web sites and URLs are also relevant as further information sources: IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator Product Web page http://www.ibm.com/software/tivoli/products/intell-orch/ IBM Tivoli Provisioning Manager Product Web page http://www.ibm.com/software/tivoli/products/prov-mgr/ Cwgwin http://www.cygwin.com/ WebSphere Application Server manuals http://www.ibm.com/software/webservers/appserv/was/library/ IBM DB2 manuals http://www.ibm.com/software/data/db2/library/ Software Support http://www.ibm.com/software/support IBM Web infrastructure orchestration http://www.ibm.com/software/tivoli/features/web-svr-prov/solution.ht ml IBM Application Framework for e-business http://www.research.ibm.com/journal/sj/401/flurry.html How to get IBM Redbooks You can search for, view, or download Redbooks, Redpapers, Hints and Tips, draft publications and Additional materials, as well as order hardcopy Redbooks or CD-ROMs, at this Web site: ibm.com/redbooks 122 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 137. Help from IBM IBM Support and downloads: ibm.com/support IBM Global Services: ibm.com/services Related publications 123
  • 138. 124 Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners
  • 140. Back cover ® IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic Orchestrator Pre Proof-of-Concept Cookbook for Business Partners Redpaper Installation and This IBM Redpaper provides advice for Business customization INTERNATIONAL Partners about how to plan for, implement, and demonstrate IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic TECHNICAL Data center Orchestrator Version 1.1.0 and IBM Tivoli Provisioning SUPPORT modeling Manager Version 1.1.0 in a pre-proof-of-concept ORGANIZATION simulated environment. Workload simulation This environment can be used to demonstrate the BUILDING TECHNICAL capabilities of the IBM Tivoli orchestration and INFORMATION BASED ON provisioning solutions using customer data, in order to PRACTICAL EXPERIENCE gain customer acceptance for the next phase of the sell cycle — to engage the Business Partner in a real IBM Redbooks are developed by proof-of-concept of IBM Tivoli Intelligent ThinkDynamic the IBM International Technical Orchestrator or IBM Tivoli Intelligent Provisioning Support Organization. Experts from IBM, Customers and Manager. Partners from around the world create timely technical information based on realistic scenarios. Specific recommendations are provided to help you implement IT solutions more effectively in your environment. For more information: ibm.com/redbooks REDP-3830-00